PANTOGRAPHIA; 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 ACCURATE COPIES OF ALL THE KNOWN 
 ALPHABETS IN THE WORLD; 
 
 . TOGETHER WITH 
 
 AN ENGLISH EXPLANATION OF THE PECULIAR 
 FORCE OR POWER OF EACH LETTER ! 
 
 TO WHICH ARE ADDED, 
 
 SPECIMENS OF ALL WELL- AUTHENTICATED 
 
 ORAL LANGUAGES; 
 
 FORMING 
 
 A COMPREHENSIVE DIGEST OF 
 
 PHONOLOGY. 
 
 By EDMUND FRY, 
 
 LETTER-FOUNDER, TYPE-STREET. 
 
 . Printed ly COOPER and WILSON, 
 For JOHN and ARTHUR ARCH, Gracechurch-Street ; 
 JOHN WHITE, Fleet-Street ; JOHN EDWARDS, Pall-Mall ; and 
 JOHN DEBRETT, Piccadilly. * 
 
 MDCCXCIX.

 
 TO 
 
 Sir JOSEPH BANKS, Bart. K. B. 
 
 PRESIDENT OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY, &c, 
 
 Whose Patronage and Encouragement 
 Are liberally extended to the Promotion of 
 
 All the 
 Useful and ornamental Arts ; 
 
 With his Permission, 
 
 THIS WORK 
 
 Is respe&fully inscribed, 
 by 
 
 The AUTHOR 
 
 1102714
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 PREFACE, pagexvii, line 18 For impression, read imperfection. 
 Page 31, line 4 For Chap. 4, read Chap. 3. 
 Page 41, line 5 For version, read reading. 
 Page 121, line 10 For antiquarians, read antiquaries, 
 Page 173, line 35 For their, read it's; and for 'were, readimf. 
 Page 19 1 , line 6 For five being simple, read fi<ue simple. 
 "-Page 237, line 14 For Political, read Philosophical.
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 WE 
 
 cannot expecl: that all our Readers will be unanimous 
 in their opinions respecting a Work of such novelty, variety, and 
 extent, as this : some may notice redundancies, or omissions ; 
 others, we fear, will find deficiencies and imperfections : for some 
 of these, we fhall make the best apology in our power. There is 
 one point, however, on which, we believe, there will be no diver- 
 sity of opinion the importance of the subject. The noblest 
 acquisition of mankind is speech ; and the mod useful art is that 
 of rendering it visible: that distinguishes Man from the brute 
 creation ; this raises him to a pre-eminence above the savages of 
 his own species. 
 
 The uses of legible language are too various to be enume- 
 rated. By the wonderful invention of writing, we are enabled 
 to record and perpetuate our thoughts for our own benefit, or 
 give them the moft extensive communication for that of others. 
 Without this art, the labors of our ancestors, in every branch of 
 knowledge, would have been lost to us; tradition being so nearly 
 allied to fable, that no authentic history can be compiled but 
 from written materials. From this source, and from ancient 
 paintings, sculptures, and medals, have philosophy, science, and 
 the arts, derived all their successive improvements : succeeding 
 generations have been enabled to add to the stock they received 
 from the past, and to prepare the way for future acquisitions. 
 
 By
 
 il PREFACE. 
 
 By this happy mode of communication, distance is, as it were, 
 annihilated, and the merchant, scholar, and statesman, be- 
 come present to every purpose of utility, in the most remote 
 regions. 
 
 The desire of communicating ideas seems to be implanted in 
 every human breast : the two most useful methods of gratifying 
 this desire are, by sounds addressed to the ear, or by representa- 
 tions or marks exhibited to the eye ; or, in other words, by 
 Speech, and Writing. The first method was rendered more com- 
 plete by the invention of the second, because it opened a door to 
 the communication of ideas, through the sense of sight, as well 
 as that of hearing. Speech may be considered as the substance ; 
 and writing, as the shadow that follows it. 
 
 The art of drawing ideas into vision, or of exhibiting the con- 
 ceptions of the mind, by legible characters, may justly be deemed 
 the noblest and most beneficial invention of which human inge- 
 nuity can boast an invention which has contributed, more than 
 all others, to the improvement of mankind. 
 
 The incalculable advantages that Man enjoys in consequence 
 of his possessing the privilege of language, and the apparent im- 
 possibility of it's being the production of human beings, has in- 
 duced ancient philosophers and modern philologists, very gene- 
 rally, to conclude that it was originally derived from the imme- 
 diate communication of t'he DEITY. As this is a queftion on 
 which sacred history has been silent, our opinions must rest upon 
 the probability of the thing itself. 
 
 If language consisted of simple vocal sounds, as those uttered 
 by cattle, sheep, or new-born children ; of those varied by mu- 
 sical tones ; or of signs produced by the motions, positions, and 
 attitudes of the human body and limbs ; there would be no dif- 
 ficulty in ascribing it's origin to the natural progress of human 
 beings in a state of society : but the wonderful circumstance re- 
 specting language is, that it consists of vocal sounds modified by 
 ARTICULATIONS. Homer and Hesiod add the epithet articu- 
 lating to Man, as characteristic of his pre-eminence. 
 
 Some of the ancients who embraced the ATOMIC philosophy 
 of Epicurus, and some moderns of high rank in the republic of 
 letters, think language was the offspring of human invention, after
 
 PREFACE. iii 
 
 men had lived long enough in a state of society, to perceive the 
 insufficiency of inarticulate cries and gestures to express the in- 
 creased variety and precision of their ideas. 
 
 It being thus evident that there is no instinctive, articulate 
 language, it has become an inquiry of some importance, how 
 mankind were first induced to fabricate articulate sounds, and 
 to employ them for the purpose of communicating their thoughts. 
 Children learn to speak by insensible imitation ; and, when ad- 
 vanced some years in life, study foreign languages under proper 
 instructors : but the first men had no speakers to imitate, no 
 formed language to study : by what means they learned to arti- 
 culate, becomes a question, on which, I apprehend, only two 
 opinions can be formed. Either language must have been origi- 
 nally revealed from HEAVEN, or be the fruit of human in- 
 dustry. The greater part of Jews and Christians, and even some 
 of the wisest Pagans, have embraced the former opinion ; which 
 seems to be supported by the authority of Moses, who represents 
 the SUPREME BEING as teaching our first parents the names 
 of animals. The latter opinion is .held by Diodorus Siculus, 
 Lucretius, Horace, and many other Greek and Roman writers, 
 who consider language as one of the arts invented by Man. 
 
 In order to judge of the validity of the arguments which may 
 be brought in support of either of these opinions, it will be 
 proper to state what is agreed on by both parties. 
 
 First, Human beings invent, or make discoveries, either by 
 accident, or by comparing means with their ends. 
 
 Second, Very few persons, even at this day, either know, 
 or can describe, the exad means by which they articulate, 
 though they have been employing them during the whole of 
 their lives. 
 
 Third, To vary any invention, or improve upon it, is infinitely 
 more easy, and totally different from being the author of such 
 invention ; yet we do not find any improvement, or scarcely any 
 difference in articulation, from the days of Moses to this time : 
 and if any person now, with every advantage in his favor, were 
 to attempt the invention or introduction of a few new articula- 
 tions, he would be convinced of it's extreme difficulty. 
 
 Fourth, Therefore, if men did invent articulations, it muft 
 
 have
 
 iv PREFACE. 
 
 have been by accidental discovery, and in a state of highly- 
 improved society. 
 
 The principal arguments in favor of language being of 
 human invention, may be comprised under the following heads, 
 viz. 
 
 1. The silence of the sacred writers on the subject. But it 
 muft be observed in reply, that Moses describes our first parents 
 as using articulate language, immediately after their creation. 
 
 2. As the principal argument on the other side is drawn from 
 the immense difficulty of inventing articulate language, so the sup- 
 porters of human invention appear most anxious to diminish, and 
 even annihilate the difficulty. 
 
 They state, that vocal sounds, tones, and gestures, are suf- 
 ficient to unite men in the desire of forming societies, and to 
 enable them to join in enterprizes, interesting to the whole com- 
 munity; which part of the argument may be supported by the 
 examples of the Bee and the Beaver. 
 
 When men are united in a state of improved society, and have 
 been in habits of enterprize of common concern, the necessity of 
 a rapid and distinct communication of ideas will make a forcible 
 impression on them. Musical tones require a musical ear, or, at 
 least, a power of sounding and distinguishing, in order to render 
 them useful signs of ideas: and the difficulty of teaching speakers 
 and hearers to understand each other distinctly by these means, 
 is, perhaps, the reason that such sounds do not form a patt of any 
 known language. 
 
 With respect to the communication of ideas by means of 
 signs and gestures of the body, it is obvious that they can have 
 no place, unless the speaker and hearer (if I may be allowed the 
 expression) have the power of seeing each other distinctly. Such 
 a part of language is therefore useless, in the night, to the blind, 
 or to those who are prevented from seeing each other. 
 
 These considerations would fufficiently impress the advantage 
 and importance of a language intelligible at all speaking dis- 
 tances, and pave the way to the improvement of the powers of 
 the human organs of utterance. The great difficulty appears in 
 acquiring the frst articulations ; for when a few had been re- 
 ceived and established, their utility and importance must have 
 
 been
 
 PREFACE. T 
 
 been so striking, that attempts to extend and diverfify the little 
 stock would not long be wanted. 
 
 Now, say the favorers of this side of the question, the hissing 
 of the Serpent would teach us, by imitation, to articulate the S, 
 which condensed becomes Z, and aspirated makes SH ; accord- 
 ingly these are three radical articulations in all languages : and 
 the hissing of the Goose would suggeft the TH and T, which 
 lead to the dense TH in the words this, there, &c., pronounced 
 by foreigners dis, dere, &c. ; thus seven articulations might have 
 been produced. The sudden closing of the lips, by accident or 
 design, during the enunciation of any vocal sound, would pro- 
 duce P, which condensed is B or V, and are accordingly radical 
 articulations in all languages. 
 
 Such a progress as this being made with so much ease, the 
 argument drawn from the difficulty of the invention loses its 
 force, and, as they infer, nodus deo -vindice dignus vanishes. 
 
 Some authors, and those too of considerable eminence, instead 
 of attempting to shew how men could and did accomplish so dif- 
 ficult a work as the formation of articulate language, content 
 themselves with such observations as the following: " Vocal 
 " sounds are founded in nature, and man would vary those 
 " sounds, as impelled by his passions, or urged by his necessities. 
 " This exercise of the organs of speech would produce articulate 
 *' voices, which are peculiar to the human species; vocal sounds 
 " expressive of emotions, being natural to brutes, as well as to 
 " men. These articulate voices are the first advances towards 
 " the formation of a language. The human organs are not, 
 " like those of moft brutes, confined to a particular species of 
 " sound ; but as men are capable of learning to imitate the 
 " several sounds of the brute creation, by those means they ac- 
 " quire a greater variety of sounds than other animals." 
 
 In answer, however, to this way of getting rid of the dif- 
 ficulty, we may observe, 
 
 I. That no nation, however savage, has been found destitute 
 of sounds modified by articulation ; therefore, that they were not 
 the inventors of them ; because savages are confessed, by the op- 
 posers of our opinion, to be incapable of such an invention *. 
 
 2. Sup- 
 * Vide Lord Monboddo, &c.
 
 vi PREFACE. 
 
 2. Supposing any individual in a state of improved society, 
 such as has been represented, to have invented the manner, or 
 rather observed the power of the human voice to articulate, 
 how could he persuade the rest of the community to adopt so- 
 extraordinary an innovation ? If proposed to them on mere hu- 
 man authority, would not the Elders rejeft it as a childifh sug- 
 gestion, which they had neither motive nor power to adopt ? 
 For we know that articulation cannot be learned after a certain 
 age. The inventor, if any, must have been young ; and his youth 
 would be an obstacle to his success in propagating his discovery 
 on one hand ; and the immense labor and time necessary for old 
 people to acquire eighteen or twenty articulations, and that 
 merely on speculation, would effectually prevent it's adoption on 
 the other, as the importance of the invention could only be de- 
 monstrated by learning and trial. 
 
 3. If every separate colony had invented it's own articulations, 
 inftead of that uniformity we every where find, infinite diversity 
 muft have presented itself. 
 
 4. We do not admit that any imitation of animals could have 
 taught the letters above mentioned, much less the N, M, R, 
 F, L, the guttural CH, or Welch LL ; therefore this account 
 of the origin of articulations cannot be admitted on mere 
 conjefture. 
 
 * Those who are of opinion that language is of divine origin, 
 consider this account of it's being of human invention, as a series 
 of mere suppositions, not founded on any fixed principle. 
 
 The opinions of Diodorus, Vitruvius, Horace, Lucretius, and 
 Cicero, frequently quoted in it's support, are, in their eftimation, 
 of no greater authority, than those of other men : for, as lan- 
 guage was formed, and brought to a great degree of perfection, 
 long before the sera of any historian with whom we are ac- 
 quainted, the antiquity of the Greek and Roman writers does not 
 give them any advantage in this inquiry over modern philo- 
 sophers. 
 
 Aristotle has defined Man to be fo p/j1o : and the defini- 
 tion is certainly so far just, that Man is much more remarkable 
 for imitation than invention ; and therefore, say the reasoners on 
 
 this 
 * Warburton, Delancy, Johnfon, Beattie, Blair, &c.
 
 PREFACE. vii 
 
 this side of the question, had the human race been originally 
 mutum et turpe pecus, they would have continued so, unless they 
 had been taught to speak by some superior intelligence. 
 
 Moses, setting aside his claim to inspiration, deserves, from 
 the consistency of his narrative, at least as much credit as Mo- 
 chus, Democritus, or Epicurus ; and, from his prior antiquity, if 
 antiquity could have any weight on this subject, he would deserve 
 more, having lived nearer to the period of which they all write. 
 But the question respecting the origin of language may be de- 
 cided without resting on authority of any kind, but merely by 
 considering the nature of speech, and the mental and corporeal 
 powers of Man. 
 
 Those who maintain it to be of human invention, suppose 
 men, at first, to have been solitary animals, and afterwards to 
 have associated without government or subordination ; then to 
 have formed political bodies, and, by their own exertions, to have 
 advanced from the grossest ignorance to the refinements of sci- 
 ence. But, say the reasoners, whose cause we espouse, this is a 
 supposition contrary to all history or experience : there is not 
 on record a well-authenticated instance, of a people emerging, 
 by their own efforts, from barbarism to civilization. There 
 have, indeed, been many nations raised from the state of savages ; 
 but it is known that they were polished by the influence of indivi- 
 duals or colonies from nations more enlightened than themselves. 
 
 The original savages of Greece were tamed by the Pelasgi, a 
 foreign tribe ; and were afterwards further polished by Orpheus, 
 Cecrops, Cadmus, &c. who derived their knowledge from Egypt 
 and the East. The ancient Romans, a ferocious and motley 
 crew, received the blessings of law and religion from a succession 
 of foreign kings ; and the conquests of the Romans, at later 
 periods, contributed to civilize the rest of Europe. In America, 
 the only two nations which, at the invasion of the Spaniards, 
 could be said to have advanced a single step from barbarism, 
 were indebted for their superiority over the other tribes, not to 
 the gradual and unassisted progress of the human mind, but to 
 the wise institutions of foreign legislators.* 
 
 It 
 
 * Fide Robertson's History of America.
 
 viii PREFACE. 
 
 It is said, that before language could have been invented, 
 mankind must have existed for ages in large political societies, 
 and have united in some common work : but, if inarticulate cries, 
 and the natural visible signs of the passions and affections, were 
 modes of communication sufficiently accurate to keep a large 
 society together for ages, and to direct it's members in the exe- 
 cution of some common work, what could be their inducement to 
 the invention of an art so useless and difficult as that of articu- 
 late language ? Let us, however, suppose, that different nations 
 of savages set about to invent an art of communicating their 
 thoughts, which, no experience could have taught them, was ab- 
 solutely necessary ; how came they all, without exception, to 
 think of the one art of articulating the voice for this purpose ? 
 Inarticulate cries, out of which language is fabricated, have an 
 instinctive connection with our passions and affections ; but 
 there are gestures, and expressions of countenance, with which 
 our passions and affections are not in the same manner con- 
 nected. 
 
 If the natural cries of passion could be so modified and en- 
 larged as to be capable of communicating to the hearer every 
 idea in the mind of the speaker, it is certain that the natural 
 gestures could be so modified as to answer the very same pur- 
 pose ; and it is strange, that among the several nations who in- 
 vented languages, not one should have attempted visible signs of 
 their ideas, but that all should have agreed to express them by 
 articulated sounds. 
 
 Every nation, whose language is narrow and rude, supplies its 
 defects by violent gesticulations; wherefore, as much less genius 
 is exerted in the improvement of any art than was requisite for 
 it's first invention, it is natural to suppose, that had men been 
 left to devise for themselves a method of communicating their 
 thoughts, they would not have attempted any other than that 
 by which they now improve the language transmitted by their 
 ancestors. It is vain to urge that articulate sounds are fitter for 
 the purpose of communicating thought than visible gesticula- 
 tion : for though this may be true, it is a truth which could 
 scarcely occur to savages, who had never experienced the fitness 
 of either j and if, to counterbalance the superior fitness of arti- 
 culation.
 
 PREFACE. ix 
 
 tulation, it's extreme difficulty be taken into view, it must appear 
 little less than miraculous, that every savage tribe should think 
 of it rather than the easier method of artificial gesticulation. 
 Savages, it is well known, are remarkable for their indolence, 
 and their preferring ease to utility ; but their modes of life give 
 such a pliancy to their bodies, that they could, with very little 
 trouble, bend their limbs and members into any position agreed 
 upon as the signs of ideas. 
 
 This is so far from being the case with respeft to the organs 
 of articulation, that it is with extreme difficulty, if at all, that 
 a man, advanced in life, can be taught to articulate sounds he 
 has not been accustomed to hear. Foreigners coming to this 
 country after the age of thirty, seldom pronounce the language 
 tolerably well ; an Englishman at that age can hardly be taught 
 to utter the guttural sound which the Welchman gives to the 
 Greek %, or even the French sound of the vowel U: and of the 
 solitary savages who have been caught in different forests, we 
 know not that there has been one who, after the age of man- 
 hood, learned to articulate any language so as to be readily un- 
 derstood. 
 
 The present age has, indeed, furnished many instances of deaf 
 persons, while young, being taught to speak intelligibly, by skilful 
 masters moulding the organs of the mouth into the positions pro- 
 per for articulating the voice ; * but who was to perform this task 
 among the inventors of language, when all mankind were equally 
 ignorant of the means by which articulation is effected ? In a 
 word, daily experience informs us, that men who have not 
 learned to articulate in their childhood, never afterwards acquire 
 the faculty of speech but by such helps as savages cannot obtain j 
 therefore, if speech was invented at all, it must have been either 
 by children who were incapable of invention, or by meri who 
 were incapable of speech. 
 
 A thou- 
 
 * In the Grange-road, Bermondsey, there has been establifhed, several 
 years, an asylum for the deaf and dumb ; the beneficial effe&s of which are 
 so obvious, that several children have already been discharged capable of un- 
 derstanding what they read or see, and of expressing all their wants by articu- 
 late language, and are now filling important stations in society.
 
 x PREFACE. 
 
 A thousand, nay, a million of children, could not think of in- 
 venting a language. While the organs are pliable, there is not 
 understanding enough to frame the conception of a language ; 
 and by the time that there is understanding, the organs are be- 
 come too stiff for the task. Therefore, say the advocates for the 
 divine origin of language, reason, as well as history, intimates, 
 that mankind, in all ages, must have been speaking animals ; the 
 young having constantly acquired this art by imitating those 
 who were older : and we may warrantably conclude, that our 
 first parents received k by divine inspiration. 
 
 To this account of the origin of language it may be objected 
 If the first language was communicated by inspiration, it must 
 have been perfect, and held in reverence by all mankind : but a 
 vast variety of languages have prevailed in the world ; and some 
 of those which are now known, are very imperfect ; and there is 
 reason to believe that many are lost. If different languages were 
 invented by different nations, all this would naturally follow 
 from the mixture of these nations : but what could induce men 
 possessed of one perfect language of divine original, to forsake 
 it for barbarous jargons of their own invention, and in every re- 
 sped inferior to that with which their forefathers or themselves 
 had been inspired ? 
 
 In answer to this objection, we urge, that nothing was given 
 by inspiration but the faculty of speech, and the elements of 
 language : for when once men had language, it is easy to con- 
 ceive how they might have modified it by their natural powers, 
 as thousands might improve what they could not have invented. 
 The first language, if given by inspiration, must in its principles 
 have had all the perfe&ion of which language is susceptible ; 
 but, from the nature of things, it could not be very copious. 
 
 The words of language are either proper names, or the signs 
 of ideas and relations ; but it cannot be supposed that the All- 
 wise Instructor would load the memories of men with words to 
 denote things then unknown, or with the signs of ideas which 
 they had not then acquired. It was sufficient that a foundation 
 was laid, of such a nature as would support the largest super- 
 structure which they might ever after have occasion to raise 
 upon it; and that they were taught the method of building it 
 
 by
 
 PREFACE. xi 
 
 by composition and derivation. This would long preserve the 
 language radically the same, though it could not prevent the 
 introduction of different dialefts into the different countries over 
 which men might spread themselves. 
 
 In whatever region we may suppose the human race to have 
 been originally placed, the increase of their numbers would, in 
 process of time, either disperse them into various nations, or ex- 
 tend the one nation to a vast distance on every side. In either 
 case, they would every where meet with new objects, which 
 would occasion the invention of new names ; and as the dif- 
 ference of climate, and other natural causes, would compel those 
 who moved eastward or northward to adopt manners, in many 
 respects, different from the modes of those who settled in the 
 west and south, a vast number of words would in one country be 
 fabricated, to denote complex conceptions, which must of 
 course be unintelligible to the body of the people inhabiting 
 countries where those conceptions could never be formed : thus 
 would various dialects be unavoidably introduced into the ori- 
 ginal language, even whilst all mankind continued in one society, 
 and under one government. But after separate and independent 
 societies were formed, these variations would become more nu- 
 merous, and the several dialefts would deviate farther and farther 
 from each other, as well as from the idiom and genius of the parent 
 tongue, in proportion to the diversity of manners of the tribes by 
 whom they were spoken. If we suppose a few persons to have 
 been banished together from the society of their brethren, or to 
 have wandered of their own accord to a distance, from which, 
 through trackless forests, or other causes, they could not return, 
 it is easy to see how the most copious language must soon have 
 become narrow, and how the offspring of inspiration must in 
 time have become so deformed, as scarcely to retain a feature of 
 the ancestor whence it originally sprang. 
 
 Men do not long retain a practical skill in those arts which 
 they never exercise : and there is an abundance of fafts to prove, 
 that a single man cast upon a desart island, and having to pro- 
 vide the necessaries of life by his own ingenuity, would soon lose 
 the art of speaking his mother -tongue with fluency. A small 
 aumber of person* cast away together, would be likely to retain 
 
 the
 
 xii PREFACE. 
 
 the art somewhat longer ; but in a space of time, not very long, 
 it would in a great measure be lost by them, or their posterity : 
 in this state of banishment, as their time would be almost wholly- 
 occupied by hunting, fishing, and other means within their 
 reach, to support a miserable existence, they would have little 
 leisure, and perhaps less desire, to preserve by conversation the 
 remembrance of that ease, and those comforts, of which they 
 would now find themselves for ever deprived ; and, of course, they 
 would soon forget all the words which, in their native language, 
 had been used to denote the accommodations and elegancies of 
 polished life. This, at least, seems to be certain, that they 
 would not attempt to teach their children a part of language, 
 which in their circumstances could be of no use to them, and of 
 which it would be impossible to make them comprehend the 
 meaning ; for where there are no ideas, the signs of them can- 
 not be made intelligible. 
 
 From such colonies as these dispersed over the earth, if is 
 probable that all the nations of savages have sprung ; which has 
 induced many philosophers to imagine, that the state of the 
 savage was originally that of man : if so, we see, that from the 
 language of inspiration a number of different diale&s must un- 
 avoidably have arisen, all very rude and narrow, retaining 
 nothing of the parent tongue, except, perhaps, the names of the 
 most conspicuous obje&s in nature, and of those wants and en- 
 joyments inseparable from humanity. 
 
 Habits of solitude dispose a savage to speak rarely ; and 
 when he does, he uses the same terms to denote different 
 ideas : Speech, therefore, in this rude condition of men, must 
 be extremely narrow, and very imperfect. Every region or 
 climate suggests a different train of ideas, and creates various 
 wants, which must be expressed either by terms entirely new, 
 or by old ones used in a new signification. Hence must 
 originate great diversity, even in the first elements of speech, 
 among all savage nations ; the words retained of the original 
 language being used in various senses, and pronounced, as we 
 may believe, with various accents. When any of those savage 
 tribes emerged from their barbarism, whether by their own 
 efforts, or by the aid of people more enlightened than them- 
 selves,
 
 PREFACE. *iii 
 
 selves, it is obvious that the improvement and copiousness of 
 their language would keep pace with their own progress in 
 knowledge, and in the arts of civil life ; but in the infinite mul- 
 titude of words which civilization and refinement add to lan- 
 guage, it would be little less than miraculous were any two 
 nations to agree upon the same sounds to represent the same 
 ideas. Superior refinement, indeed, may induce imitation, con- 
 quest may impose a language, and extension of empire may 
 melt down different nations and dialefts into one mass: but in- 
 dependent tribes naturally give rise to diversity of tongues ; nor 
 does it seem possible that they should retain more of the original 
 language than the words expressive of those obje&s with which 
 men are at all times equally concerned. 
 
 The variety of tongues therefore, the copiousness of some, 
 and the narrowness of others, furnish no good obje&ion to the 
 divine origin of language ; for whether language was at first 
 revealed from Heaven, or in a course of ages invented by men, a 
 multitude of dialects would inevitably arise, as soon as the human 
 race was separated into a number of distinct and independent 
 nations. We do not pretend to decide for our readers in a 
 question of this nature, but have given the best arguments on 
 both sides which we could either devise or find in the writings 
 of others ; and if it be seen, as we doubt not it will, that our 
 own judgment leans to the side of revelation, let us not be 
 hastily condemned by those, whose knowledge of languages 
 extends no farther than to Greece and Rome, France and 
 England ; for if they carry their philological inquiries to 
 the East, they may, perhaps, be able to trace the remains of 
 one original language through a great part of the Globe at 
 present. 
 
 Whatever opinions we adopt with respect to the origin of the 
 first language, or the causes of the great diversity in various 
 tongues at this day, we shall doubtless entertain the sentiment, 
 that languages must have preceded, by many centuries, any at- 
 tempt to depict the ideas of them, or to denote the sounds by 
 permanently visible marks. It is only in a highly-cultivated 
 state of society that written language can be necessary. The 
 first attempts to depict thought, would undoubtedly be rude and 
 
 imperfect
 
 Sir PREFACE. 
 
 imperfect representations of visible obje&s ; such as were found 
 among the Mexicans on the discovery of America. 
 
 A Ron might be sketched to import fierceness or valour ; an 
 ox, to denote strength ; a stag, swiftness j and a bare, to inti- 
 mate timidity, &c. 
 
 The next step in this process would naturally extend to the 
 inventing and appropriating of a few arbitrary characters for 
 representing abstract and other ideas, which could not be well 
 ascertained by the methods above mentioned ; which arbitrary 
 signs might readily acquire a currency by compact, as money 
 and medals do over a great part of the world : upon this plan, 
 we imagine, the ancient Chinese formed their manner of writing 
 their language. 
 
 But neither the picture nor the hieroglyphic, nor the method 
 of denoting ideas by arbitrary characters appropriated by com- 
 pact, could ever have arrived at such perfection, as to answer all 
 the purposes of ideal communication. The grand desideratum 
 then would be, to fabricate characters to represent simple sounds, 
 and to reduce these characters to so small a nnmber as to be 
 easily learned and preserved in the memory. In this attempt 
 the Chinese have notoriously failed: their letters, or rather their 
 characters, being so numerous, that few, if any, of their most 
 industrious scholars, have been able to learn and retain the whole 
 catalogue : indeed those people are not able to conceive how 
 any combinations of twenty or thirty characters should be com- 
 petent to all the purposes of written language. 
 
 There is little difficulty in conceiving a gradual abridgement, 
 or contraction of these pictures, till we arrive at the state in 
 which tht Chinese alphabet (if we may use such an expression) 
 is found at present ; but we cannot suppose that a people who 
 had arrived at such a degree of perfection in expressing their 
 ideas by \isible signs, should ever discover a gradual method of 
 passing over to the use of alphabets, or suddenly abandon their 
 inveterate habits at the instigation of any individual, who may 
 have discovered the superior excellency of that manner of de- 
 noting language. 
 
 These considerations lead us to inquire, whether it is proba- 
 ble that men, in any state of society, could have invented and 
 
 introduced
 
 PREFACE. x* 
 
 introduced among their fellow-citizens the use of an alphabet, 
 without supernatural assistance ; or whether it is probable that 
 any progressive improvement of the human mind, could change 
 symbolic or picture writing into that of alphabetical characters. 
 
 That alphabets, as well as language, are of divine origin, 
 is attempted to be supported by the following considerations, 
 ^iz. 
 
 Much has been written, and numerous hypotheses proposed, 
 to investigate the origin of alphabetic writing ; to give even an. 
 abridged account of which, would far exceed the limits of this 
 Preface. 
 
 Many nations have claimed the honour of this invention. 
 The Greeks ascribed it to the Phenicians, and consequently 
 used the word ^OIVEX^V, to al the Pbenlcian, in the same sense 
 with a.iotyituux.t, to read: and Lucan ascribes the invention to 
 the same ingenious people. 
 
 That the Assyrian, Chaldaic, and Hebrew languages, were 
 the same, most of the learned are fixed in their opinions ; and 
 that their alphabets are of antidiluvian antiquity, appears highly 
 probable : for had an invention of such vast importance to 
 mankind been made since that period, we conclude the author 
 would have been commemorated in the annals of the country 
 in which he lived. Jpsephus, book i, chap. 3, informs us, 
 that SETH erected two pillars, one of brick, and the other of 
 ftone, and inscribed upon them their astronomical observations, 
 and other improvements, (See CHALDEAN, No. 4, page 31, of 
 this work) ; which shews that there did exist such an opinion of 
 the antiquity of the art of writing. 
 
 Among the European nations we do not find any who pretend 
 to the invention of letters. All of them derived the art from 
 the Romans, except the Turks, who had it from the Arabians. 
 The Romans never claimed the discovery, but confessed their 
 knowledge to have been received from the Greeks, who owned 
 that they had it from the Phenicians, who, as well as their, 
 colonists the Carthaginians, spoke a dialed of the Hebrew 
 scarcely varying from the original. The Coptic resembles the 
 Greek in most of its characters, and is therefore referred to the 
 same original. The Chaldean, Syriac, and latter Samaritan, are 
 
 dialed!
 
 xvl PREFACE. 
 
 dialects of the Hebrew, without any considerable deviation, of 
 many additional words. 
 
 The Ethiopia differs more from the Hebrew, but less from the 
 Arabic ; all these languages have issued from the same stock, as 
 the similarity of their formation, and the numberless words com- 
 mon to them all, sufficiently evince. Alterations would natur- 
 ally be produced, in proportion to the civilization of the several 
 nations, and their intercourse with others, which will account 
 for the superior copiousness of some above the rest. It appears 
 then, that all the languages in use among men that have been 
 conveyed in alphabetical characters, have been those of people 
 connected ultimately or immediately with the Hebrews, to 
 whom we are indebted for the earliest specimens of the commu- 
 nication of ideas by writing. 
 
 This proposition will be farther confirmed, by considering the 
 sameness of the artificial denominations of the letters in the 
 Oriental, Greek and Latin languages, accompanied by a similar 
 arrangement, as alpha, beta, &c. It may still be objected, how- 
 ever, that the characters employed by the ancients to discrimi- 
 nate their letters, are entirely dissimilar: it maybe urged, why 
 should not one nation adopt from another the mode of ex- 
 ptessing the art, as well as the art itself? Such an effect would 
 not be very likely to take place, before the art of printing had 
 established an uniformity of character. 
 
 The old Samaritan is precisely the same as the Hebrew lan- 
 guage; and the Samaritan Pentateuch does not vary a single 
 letter in twenty words from the Hebrew : but the characters 
 are very different ; for the Jews adopted the Chaldaic letters 
 during their captivity at Babylon, instead of those of their fore- 
 fathers. 
 
 What we know of those nations who have continued for many 
 centuries unconnected with the rest of the world, strongly mili- 
 tates against the hypothesis of the human invention of alpha- 
 betical writing. The experiment has been fairly made upon the 
 ingenuity of mankind, both Chinese and savage, for a longer 
 period than that which is supposed to have produced alphabetic 
 writing by regular gradations, which decidedly concludes against 
 this art being of human invention. 
 
 the
 
 PREFACE. XTii 
 
 The Chinese, a people famous for their discoveries and 
 mechanical genius, have made some advances towards the de- 
 lineation of their ideas, by arbitrary signs ; nevertheless, have 
 been unable to accomplish this exquisite device; and, after so 
 long a trial to no purpose, we may reasonably infer, that their 
 mode of writing, which is growing more intricate and volu- 
 minous every day, will never terminate in so clear, so compara- 
 tively simple, an expedient, as that of alphabetical characters. 
 
 We shall consider the argument on which the commonly re- 
 ceived supposition entirely depends ; that is, the natural grada- 
 tion through the several species of symbols acknowledged to 
 have been in use with various people, terminating by an easy 
 transition, in the detection of alphabetical characters : we be- 
 lieve the strength of this argument will be fairly appreciated 
 from the following representation. 
 
 The first method of embodying ideas would be by drawing a 
 representation of the images themselves : the impression of which 
 method is very obvious, both on account of it's tediousness, and 
 inability to go beyond external appearances, or to denote the 
 abstract ideas of the mind. 
 
 The next method would be somewhat more general, and 
 would substitute two or three circumstances for the whole trans- 
 action : so two Kings, for example, engaging each other with 
 military weapons, might convey the idea of a war between 
 two nations. This abbreviated method would be more expe- 
 ditious than the former; but what is gained in conciseness would 
 be lost in perspicuity. It is a description more compendious 
 indeed, but still a description of outward objects alone ; to 
 which head may be referred the picture-writing of the Mexi- 
 cans. 
 
 The next advance would be to the use of symbols the in- 
 corporation, as it were, of abstract and complex ideas in figuref, 
 more or less generalized in proportion to the improvement of it. 
 Thus, in the earlier stages of this device, a circle might express 
 the sun, or a semicircle the moon, which is only a contraction of 
 the foregoing method. This symbol-writing, in it's advanced 
 state, would become more refined, but enigmatical and myste- 
 rious in proportion to that refinement : hence it would be less 
 
 fit
 
 xvlii PREFACE. 
 
 fit for common use therefore more particularly appropriate to 
 philosophy and religion. 
 
 This method being still too subtile and complicated for 
 general use, the only plan to be pursued was a reduction of the 
 first stage of the preceeding; thus a dot instead of a circle 
 might stand for the sun, and a similar abbreviation might be ex- 
 tended to all the symbols. On this scheme, every object and 
 idea would have it's appropriate mark, which might be multi- 
 plied in proportion to the works of nature and the operations of 
 the mind. This plan was also practised by the Egyptians, but 
 has been carried to greater perfection by the Chinese ; the vo- 
 cabulary of the latter is therefore capable of being extended to 
 any imaginary length. But if we compare this tedious and 
 awkward contrivance with the astonishing brevity and perspi- 
 cuity of alphabetical writing, we must be persuaded that no two 
 things can be more dissimilar ; and that the transition from a 
 scheme constantly enlarging itself, and growing daily more in- 
 tricate, to the expression of every possible idea by a modified 
 arrangement of twenty-four marks, is not so very easy and per- 
 ceptible as may be imagined : indeed, this seems still to be rather 
 an expression of things, in a manner similar to the second stage 
 of symbol-writing, than the notification of ideas by arbitrary 
 signs. 
 
 To all this we shall subjoin the following remarks, to give 
 strength to the foregoing reasoning, viz. 
 
 ist, Pliny asserts the use of letters to have been eternal; 
 which shews the antiquity of the practice to have extended be- 
 yond the era of authentic history. 
 
 ad, The cabalistic doctors of the Jews maintain, that alpha- 
 betic writing was one of the ten things which GOD created on 
 the evening of the sabbath. 
 
 3d, Most of the profane authors of antiquity ascribe the use 
 of alphabetical characters to the Egyptians, who, according to 
 some, received them from Mercury ; or, as others suppose, from 
 their god Tenth. 
 
 These are mere conjectures and fables. 
 
 Many pious and learned authors have contended, that the 
 alphabet was first given with the law from Mount Sinai ; but we 
 
 presume
 
 PREFACE. xix 
 
 presume the following state of fafts will invalidate such an 
 opinion. 
 
 The firft mention of Writing recorded in Scripture, will be 
 found in Exod. xvii. 14. " And the LORD said unto Moses, Write 
 " this for a memorial, in a book ; and rehearse it in the ears of 
 " Joshua ; for I will utterly put out the remembrance of Amalck 
 " from under Heaven." This command was given immediately 
 after the defeat of the Amalekites near Horeb, and before the 
 arrival of the Israelites at Mount Sinai. 
 
 It is observable that there is not the least hint to induce us to 
 believe that writing was then newly invented ; on the contrary, 
 we may conclude that Moses understood what was meant by 
 writing in a book; otherwise the ALMIGHTY would have in- 
 stru&ed him, as he did Noah in building the ark ; for he would 
 not have commanded him to write in a book, if he had been ig- 
 norant of the art of writing : but Moses did not express any 
 difficulty of comprehension when he received this command. 
 We also find, that Moses wrote all the words, and all the judge- 
 ments of the LORD, contained in the 2ist and two following 
 chapters of Exodus, before the two written tables of stone were 
 so much as promised. The delivery of the tables is not mentioned 
 till the 1 8th verse of the 3ist chapter, after GOD had made an 
 end of communing with him on the Mount, though the ten 
 commandments were promulgated immediately after his third 
 descent. 
 
 It is also observable, that Moses no where mentions that the 
 alphabet was a new thing in his time, much less that he was the 
 inventor of it ; on the contrary, he speaks of the art of writing, 
 as a thing well known, and in familiar use ; for Exod. xxviii. 21, 
 he says, " And the stones mall be with the names of the chil- 
 " dren of Israel, Twelve', according to their names, like the 
 " engravings of a signet, every one with his name, shall they be, 
 " according to the twelve tribes." And again, v. 36, " And 
 " thou shalt make a plate of pure gold, and grave upon it, like 
 " the engravings of a signet, HOLINESS TO THE LORD." 
 Can language be more expressive ? Would it not be absurd to 
 deny, that this sentence muft have been in words and letters ? 
 But writing was known and practised by the people in general,
 
 xx PREFACE. 
 
 in the time of Moses, as appears from the following texts, 
 Deut. vi. 9, xi. 20, xvii. 18, xxiv. i, xxvii. 3, 8. By the last 
 text the people were commanded to write the law on stones ; and 
 it is to be noticed, that some of the above texts relate to trans- 
 actions pre vlous to the delivery of the law at Mount Sinai. 
 
 If we call the different dialects of the various nations that 
 inhabit the known parts of the Globe, languages, the number 
 is truly great ; and vain and useless would be his ambition who 
 should attempt to learn them. We shall begin with naming 
 the principal, which are four, and may be termed the original 
 or mother-tongues, and seem to have given birth to all that are 
 spoken in Europe, viz. the Latin, Celtic, Gothic and Sclavo- 
 nian. It will not, however, be imagined, from the term original 
 given to these languages, that we believe them to have been 
 handed to us without any alteration, from the confusion of 
 tongues at the building of the tower of Babel. We have ex- 
 pressed our opinion, that there was but one truly original lan- 
 guage, from which all others are derivations variously modified. 
 The four tongues just mentioned are original only, as being the 
 immediate parents of those now spoken in Europe. 
 
 From the Latin came 
 The Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, and French ; and 
 
 From the Celtic, 
 
 The Welch, Erse or Gaelic, Irish, Bretagne or Aremorican, 
 and that of the Waldenses. 
 
 From the Gothic, 
 
 The High and Low Dutch ; the English, which is also en- 
 riched with the spoils of many other languages ; the Danish, 
 Norwegian, Swedish, and the Icelandic or Runic. 
 
 From the Sclavonian, 
 
 The Polish, Lithuanian, Bohemian, Vandalian, Croatian, 
 Russian, Garnish, Dalmatian, Lusatian, Moldavian, and 
 many others. 
 
 The languages at present generally spoken in Asia are, 
 The Turkish, Tartarian, Persian and modern Arabic, 
 Georgian, Armenian, modern Indian, Formosan, Indos- 
 anic, Tamoulic or Malabaric, the Chinese, Japonese, &c. 
 Here we have enumerated only such Asiatic languages, of 
 
 which
 
 PREFACE. xxi 
 
 which we have some knowledge by alphabets, grammars, or 
 other books ; there are, doubtless, many other tongues and 
 dialects in those vast regions and adjacent islands, of which we 
 are not able to give any account. 
 
 The principal languages of Africa are, 
 
 The Egyptian, Fetuitic, or of the kingdom of Fetu, the 
 Mauritanian or Moroccan, and the jargon of those savage 
 nations inhabiting the deserts. The people on the coast of 
 Barbary speak a corrupt dialecl; of the Arabic : to these may 
 be added the Chilhic, or Tamazeght, the Negritian, and that 
 of Guinea, the Abyssinian, and that of the Hottentots. 
 
 The languages of the American nations are but little known 
 in Europe. Those of the Mexicans and Peruvians seem to be 
 the most regular and polished ; there is also one, called Pocon- 
 chi, used in the bay of Honduras, the words and rules of which 
 are known to us. The languages of North America are, in 
 general, the Algonhic, the Apalachian, Mohawk, and those 
 of Savannah, Virginia, and Mexico. In South America, the 
 Peruvian, the Caribic, the Cairic, and the Tucumanian, 
 with the languages of Chili, Paraguay, Brasil, and Guiana. 
 But there can be no doubt that in North America the English 
 and French, and in South America the Spanish languages, pre- 
 vail more extensively than any others. 
 
 Having already observed that it would be a vain undertaking 
 for any man to attempt the study of all these languages, and to 
 make his head an universal dictionary ; so it would be absurd in 
 us to offer any analysis of them in this place : but a few reflec- 
 tions may, perhaps, be permitted. 
 
 Among the modern languages of Europe, the French de- 
 serves great attention : it is elegant and pleasing ; and is there- 
 fore become so general, that with it we may make the tour of 
 this quarter of the globe without much need of an interpreter. 
 
 The German and Italian likewise merit particular notice ; 
 as does the English, perhaps above all, for it's many and great 
 excellencies. See p. 60 of this work. 
 
 The other languages of Europe have their beauties and ex- 
 cellencies ; but the greatest difficulty in all living languages is 
 in the pronunciation, which is scarcely possible for any one to 
 
 attain,
 
 xxii PREFACE. 
 
 attain, unless he were born or educated in the country where it is 
 spoken ; and it is very difficult to extend our knowledge so far 
 as to be able to form a critical judgment of them. 
 
 Those that are derived from the Latin have the advantage of 
 adopting, without restraint, and without offending the ear, 
 Greek and Latin words and expressions ; which privilege is 
 forbidden the Germans, who, in their best compositions, dare not 
 use any foreign word, unless it be some technical term in case of 
 great necessity. 
 
 Such is the general sketch of the origin and diffusion of 
 languages and alphabets, which we apprehend will be deemed 
 sufficientjto shew the extent and importance of the subject. We 
 shall now proceed with some account of the execution of the work. 
 
 The design of this work is to promote the diffusion of Sci- 
 ence, which is effected in all cases, by facilitating the communi- 
 cation of ideas, at present done by means of oral or written 
 language only. 
 
 The limits prescribed to this Volume render it impossible for 
 the Author to enter into minute details or anecdotes, even of the 
 most important languages : his view is rather to give an outline 
 of the subject, to shew what is commonly known, and to put it 
 into the power of philologists to extend the sphere of our know- 
 ledge ; and to furnish them with a centre of communication, to 
 which their researches and discoveries may be directed. He has, 
 therefore, only given what he promised ; hoping it will enable 
 both his friends and critics to state the errors, omissions, re- 
 dundancies^ &c. which he will endeavour to rectify on some 
 future occasion. No extensive work was ever brought to per- 
 fection at once ; but something must be begun to form a ground 
 for criticism and improvement. 
 
 Secret alphabets, or methods of conducting private cor- 
 respondences, admit of infinite diversity; and as no one method 
 has ever obtained generally in any country, they were not 
 judged admissible in a work of this kind. The only, or, at 
 least, most impenetrable method of secret correspondence, is by 
 means of the same edition of a printed or manuscript book, 
 possessed by each correspondent ; so that the word intended 
 may be found, by quoting the page, line, and word of that line, 
 
 which
 
 PREFACE. xxiii 
 
 which may be conducted in such a manner as to frustrate all the 
 principles of decyphering. 
 
 The note respecting each alphabet or specimen contains the 
 time when it was used ; the inventor or patron ; the time it con- 
 tinued in use or flourished ; and the authorities for these several 
 circumstances, as far as could be collected. 
 
 We cannot vouch for the authenticity of the ancient alpha- 
 bets, as those of Adam, Noah, Ninus, &c. ; but in a work pro- 
 fessing to exhibit all, it was thought proper to give those met 
 with on respectable authority. 
 
 There is no doubt that all the alphabets in the world are very 
 imperfect, in point of letters, for the several simple or usual 
 sounds in those languages ; as, perhaps, no tongue can express 
 it's words with less than about forty characters. 
 
 For the reason above alleged, we have not attempted to give 
 short hand, or secret alphabets, the most approved systems of 
 which are Holdsworth and Aldridge, Gurney, Hodgson, 
 Blanchard and Byrom. 
 
 The principal object of an undertaking of this nature is to 
 exhibit correct copies or representations of those alphabets 
 which are at present known : for this purpose, the Author has 
 spared no pains nor expense in procuring the most authentic 
 originals and engraved copies which have come to his know- 
 ledge. He cannot omit this opportunity of expressing his 
 grateful acknowledgments to those liberal and enlightened 
 Antiquaries who have so kindly communicated their stores with 
 him. From these sources he has copied every character with 
 his own hand, and with all the exactness in his power. 
 
 With respect to the sound or force of each letter, the Author 
 has collected them from the same respectable authorities ; but it 
 will be obvious to his learned readers, that no combination of 
 letters in one language, can exactly represent the pronunciation 
 of those of another : for instance, no letters in the English can 
 represent the sound of the French u, eu, en, &c. If the Author 
 could not, in the compass allotted to this work, enter into a dis- 
 cussion of the pronunciation of the letters of the several alpha- 
 bets, still less would it have been consistent with his plan, had 
 he been qualified for the tafk, to enter upon the grammatical 
 construction or peculiarities of the different languages. 
 
 Though
 
 xxir PREFACE. 
 
 Though oral languages are not striaiy connected with an 
 exhibition of alphabets, yet the Author concluded that it would 
 be a considerable gratification to his readers to see the diversity 
 of diale&s which have arisen from the original tongue, if any 
 such existed. 
 
 The alphabetical arrangement of the matter of this work has 
 been preferred to any other mode with an index, and we trust it 
 will be generally most approved ; but great care has been taken to 
 place alphabets, or languages of one name, in chronological order. 
 Many alphabets and dialects having received a variety of 
 names, all of which could not, with propriety, be introduced 
 under the alphabetic titles, a Table of Synonymes is added, 
 to facilitate the finding of any article : which Table the reader is 
 referred to, if he find himself at any loss in this respect : for ex- 
 ample, Sanskrita is not found in the alphabetical arrangement, 
 but under the more appropriate name Nagari, &c. 
 
 We have given a list of those Subscribers who have favoured 
 us with permission to insert their names ; and feel grateful 
 for this public testimony of their approbation of the under- 
 taking. The support of so many known friends to Litera- 
 ture and the Arts, has animated the Author to exertions 
 which he could not have made on the suggestions of his own 
 solitary opinion. His warmest acknowledgments are also 
 due to those Gentlemen, distinguished by their learning and 
 science in antiquities, by whose assistance he has added to the 
 collection upwards of seventy articles since the publication of 
 the Prospectus. If his feeble endeavours may be hereafter 
 found to have been in any degree of service to the Literary 
 World, and a future amended edition of, or a supplement to, the 
 Pantographia, may meet encouragement, as the Plan is now 
 before the Public ; he will solicit the kind assistance of the 
 Antiquary, the Virtuoso, and of every Gentleman possessed of 
 an alphabet, or specimen of oral language, of good authority, 
 which shall be faithfully given in the work. He is sensible 
 that, in a work of this kind, the candid Critic may find many 
 opportunities for the display of his learning and acumen ; 
 but he hopes the novelty, extent, and importance of the 
 subject, will shield his errors or omissions from the severity of 
 censure. 
 
 TABLE
 
 [ XXV ] 
 
 TABLE of SYNONYM ES. 
 
 For Belgic, .... See Low Dutch. 
 
 Bramin, Nagari. 
 
 Bretagne, .... Arf-morican. 
 Chancery text, . . . English 1 6. 
 Church text, . . . Ditto 20. 
 Court or Exchequer, . Ditto 18. 
 Damot Agow, . . . Ethiopia I. 
 
 Erse, Celtic. 
 
 Etrurian, . . . Etruscan. 
 Engrossing or Secretary, English zi. 
 
 Falasha, Ethiopic r . 
 
 Gaelic, . . * . . Celtic. 
 
 Gafat, Ethiopic i. 
 
 Galla, Ditto. 
 
 Geez, Ditto. 
 
 Hibernian, .... Irish. 
 
 Iberian, ..... Georgian. 
 
 Kufic, ...... Arabic I. 
 
 Moroccan, .... Ditto 4. 
 
 Pali, Bali. 
 
 Papuan, New Guinea. 
 
 Pelasgic, .... Greek i, 2, and 3. 
 Rhaetian, . . . , . Grisons. 
 Sanskrita, .... Nagari. 
 
 Swiss, Helvetian. 
 
 Tcheratz Agow, . . . Ethiopic 1. 
 Tufcan, . . . - . Etruscan. 
 
 C^T Under Samaritan, Hebrew, Chaldean, Greek, Latin, &c. 
 will be found several varieties of character, distinguished by 
 particular names, which were not thought necessary to be enu- 
 merated in this place* 
 
 AuTHO-
 
 [ XXYi ] 
 
 AUTHORITIES quoted in this Work. 
 
 Oratio Dominica, plus centum linguis, Versionibus, aut Charac- 
 
 teribus reddita et expressa. 410. Lond. 1713. 
 Oratio Dominica, in diversas ominum fere Gentium linguas 
 
 versa, et propriis cujusque linguae charafteribus expressa. 
 
 Editore Johanne Chamberlaynio. 410. Amst. 1/15. 
 Dr. Barnard's Tables. Oxford, 1689. 
 Dr. Morton's Tables. London, 1759. 
 Manuel Typographique. Par Fournier le Jeune, 2 vols, I2mo. 
 
 Paris, 1766. 
 Essay towards a real Character, and Philosophical Language, 
 
 by John Wilkins, D. D. folio, London, 1668. 
 
 Encyclopedic Fran9oise, folio, Livourne, 1772. 
 
 Thresor de 1'Hiftoire des Langues de cest Univers. Par M. 
 
 Claude Duret. 410. Yverdon, 1619. 
 An Analysis of the Galic Language, by William Shaw, A. M. 
 
 I2mo. Edinb. 1778. 
 Unheard-of Curiosities concerning the talismanical Sculpture of 
 
 the Persians, &c. by James Gaffarel, I2mo. Lond. 1650. 
 Ezechielis Spanhemii dissertationes de usu et prsestantia numis- 
 
 matum antiquorum, folio, 1704. 
 Recherches Nouvelles sur la Science des Medailles, &c. par 
 
 Poinsinet de Sivry, 410. Masstricht, 1778. 
 Rerum Sicularum Scriptores praeciput ex recentioribus, &c. 
 
 Auctor Thomas Fazellus, folio, Francofurti ad Mcenum, 
 
 '579- 
 History of the Origin and Progress of Printing, by Philip 
 
 Luckombe, 8vo. London, 1774. 
 
 A new
 
 AUTHORITIES. xxvii 
 
 A new System of modern Geography, by W. Guthrie, Esq. 
 
 4to. London, 1795. 
 Dictionary of the English Language, by Samuel Johnson, 
 
 L.L.D. 2 vols. 4to. London, 1785. 
 Chronicon Saxonicum, ex MSS. codicibus, &c. by Edmund 
 
 Gibson, A.B. 410. Oxford, 1692. 
 Institutions of Language, containing a Physico-grammatical 
 
 Essay on the propriety and rationale of the English Tongue, 
 
 by B. Martin, 8vo. London, 1748. 
 On the radical Letters of the Pelasgians, and their derivatives, 
 
 by Thomas Astle, Esq. F.R.S. and F.A.S. 410. London, 
 
 1785. 
 
 The Origin and Progress of Writing, as well Hieroglyphic as 
 Elementary, &c. &c. By Thomas Astle, Esq. F.R.S. F.A.S. 
 &c. 410. London, 1784. 
 
 A Voyage round the World in the years 1785, 6, 7, and 8, by 
 
 J. F.G. de la Perouse, 8vo. London, 1798. 
 Epreuves Generales des Chara&eres, avec un traite des Langues 
 
 Etrangeres, de leurs Alphabets, et des Chiffres. A LA PLUME. 
 
 Par le Clabart, folio, Paris. 
 
 This is an extraordinary specimen of band-writing in imitation of 
 every kind of printing and <wood cuts, on 651 pages of vellum ; //' also 
 contains specimens from 58 books, independent of those which are complete, 
 viz. La Nef des Fous du Monde La Danse Macabre La Danse de 
 Mort,en Allemande Le Norn de Dieu en Cinquante Langues, &c. &c. 
 The drawings are executed 'with wonderful spirit, and the 'whole forms 
 an astonishing monument of ingenuity and patience ; bound in morocco, 
 luitb gilt leaves. 
 
 This curious Unique is in the Author's possession. 
 
 The Origin and Progress of Letters, by William Massey, 8vo. 
 
 London, 1763. 
 A compendious History of the Goths, Swedes and Vandals, &c. 
 
 by Olaus Magnus, Archbishop of Upsal, &c. folio, London, 
 
 1658. 
 Antiquitates Asiaticae Clmstianam jEratn Antecedentes, &c. 
 
 per Edmundum Chishull, S. T. B. folio, London, 1728. 
 
 Encyclo-
 
 xxviii AUTHORITIES. 
 
 Encyclopaedia Britannica, 410. Edinburgh, 1797. 
 Palseographia Graeca, sive de ortu et progressu Literarum Grae- 
 
 carum, &c. D. Bernardo de Montfaucon, folio, Parisiis, 
 
 1708. 
 A Voyage to New Guinea and the Moluccas, by Capt. Thomas 
 
 Forrest, 4to. London, 1780. 
 A Discovrse of the Orientall Tongues, by Christian Ravis, 
 
 I2rao. London, 1649. 
 Travels in Europe, Asia and Africa, by Charles Peter Thun- 
 
 berg, M. D. &c. 8vo. London, 1796. 
 Van Troil's Letters on Iceland, 8vo. 1780. 
 An Essay on the Irish Language, by Major Valiancy, irmo. 
 
 Dublin, 1772. 
 Vocabularia Linguarum Totius Orbis Comparativa, colle&ed by 
 
 command of the late Empress of Russia, 2 vols. 410. Peters- 
 burgh, 1786. 
 
 Novum Testamentum, &c. Erasmi, folio, Basil, 1570. 
 Biblia Sacra Castellionis, folio, Frankf. 1697. 
 Novum Testamentum Bezse, folio, Genev. 1598. 
 Gentleman's Magazine. 
 Monthly Magazine. 
 
 Alphabets Varia. Typis sacrse congregationis de propaganda 
 fide, 2 vols. 8vo. Romas. 
 
 Essay on Medals, by J. Pinkerton, 8vo. London, 1789. 
 Political, miscellaneous and philosophical Pieces, by Dr. Frank- 
 lin, 8vo. London, 1779. 
 
 Remaines concerning Britain, &c. by William Camden, Esq. 
 4to. London, 1657. 
 
 The History of Sumatra, by William Marsden, F.R.S. 410. 
 London, 1783. 
 
 Linguarum duodecim chara&eribus differentium Alphabetum, 
 &c. Gulielmi Postelli Diligentia, 4to. Paris, 1538. -This 
 work is not paged. 
 
 Universal
 
 AUTHORITIES. xxix 
 
 Universal Gazetteer, by John Walker, 8vo. London, 1795. 
 Journal of a Voyage to the South Seas, from papers of the late 
 
 Sydney Parkinson, 410. London, 1784. 
 A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, by Captains Cook, King, &c. 
 
 3 vols. 410. London, 1785. 
 Antiquities of Ireland, by Edward Ledwich, L. L. B. 
 
 M.R.I. A. F.A.S. 410. Dublin, 1790. 
 The Antiquities, Natural History, Ruins, and other Curiosities, 
 
 of Egypt, Nubia and Thebes, by Frederic Lewis Norden, 
 
 2 vols. folio, London, 1780. 
 Chronological Antiquities, &c. by John Jackson, 3 vols. 410. 
 
 London, 1752. 
 The Works of Thomas Wilson, D.D. late Bishop of Sodor and 
 
 Man, 2 vols. folio, Bath, 1782.
 
 SUBSCRIBERS. 
 
 Aynslic, Lord Charles, Littleharle Tower, Northumberland. 
 
 Adair, Alexander, Esq. 
 
 Alers, William, Esq. Fenchurch Street. 
 
 Acworth, Ball Buckridge, Esq. Marsham Street. 
 
 All wood, Rev. P. Wandsworth. 
 
 Antrobus, Rev. P. Whitley, Cheshire. 
 
 Ashburner, Luke, Esq. Bombay. 
 
 Arch, J. and A. booksellers, i 2 copie*. 
 
 Ash, Gregory, Bristol. 
 
 Bute, Marquis of Bute, F. A. S. 
 
 Banks, Sir Joseph, Bart. K. B. President of the Royal Society, 
 F.A.S. &c. &c. 
 
 Boddington, Samuel, Esq. Mark Lane. 
 
 Barnes, John, Esq. Thirlby. 
 
 Barnes, Rev. John, M. A. Master of St. Bee's School, Cum- 
 berland. 
 
 Barclay, Robert, F. L. S. Clapham Terrace. 
 
 Babington, William, M.D. Basinghall Street. 
 
 Baldwin, Henry, Esq. Bridge Street. 
 
 Bradley, Thomas, M.D. De La Hay Street, Westminster. 
 
 Brand, Rev. John, M. A. Secretary to the Society of Anti- 
 quaries. 
 
 Barry, Bartholomew, Bristol. 
 
 Bawcutt, Martin, Esq. Coventry. 
 
 Barfield, John, printer, London. 
 
 B. Rev. P. L.L.D. Deal. 
 
 Bensley, Thomas, printer, London. 
 
 Birch, Thomas, Esq. 
 
 Boys, William, Esq. F.A.S. Walmer. 
 
 Boucher,
 
 SUBSCRIBERS. xxxi 
 
 Boucher, Rev. Jonathan, A. M. F. A. S. 
 Bulgin, William, Bristol. 
 Bishop, William, Basingstoke. 
 Bye, Deodatus, printer, London. 
 Bulmer, William, printer, London. 
 Bloomer, Samuel, Esq. Kingsland Crescent. 
 Brickwood, John, Esq. Billiter Square. 
 
 Cavendish, Henry, Esq. F.R.S. F.A.S. Trust. Brlt.Mus. 
 
 Clayton, Sir Richard, Bart. Adlington, Lancashire. 
 
 Cuthbert, J. R. Esq. 
 
 Cunnington, William, Esq. Heytesbury. 
 
 Carter, Rev. J. M.A. F.A.S. head master of the Grammar 
 
 school, Lincoln. 
 
 Creser, Thomas, Fenchurch Street. 
 Caslon, Elizabeth, Chiswell Street. 
 Cooper, Joseph, printer, London. 
 
 Crachrode, Rev.C. M. M.A. F.R.S. F.A.S. Trust. Brit. Mus. 
 Cruttwell, Richard, Bath. 
 Clarke, J. C. Esq. Barbican. 
 Capper, Jasper, Gracechurch Street. 
 Catley, Stephen, Esq. 
 Cockfield, Joseph, Upton. 
 Chalmers, Alex. Esq. Throgmorton Street. 
 
 Durham, Bishop of. 
 
 Disney, John. D. D. F.A.S. 
 
 Denman, Thomas, M. D. 
 
 Denman, Thomas, Esq. 
 
 Dennison, Richard, M.D. F.A.S. 
 
 Dickinson, Rev. P. A.M. Hoxton Square. 
 
 Debrett, John, bookseller, 3 copies. 
 
 Davies, John, Basingstoke. 
 
 Downes, Joseph, printer, London. 
 
 Dibdin, Charles, Esq. 
 
 Du Val, Philip, D.D. F.R.S. F.A.S. 
 
 Edwards,
 
 xxxii SUBSCRIBERS. 
 
 Edwards, John, bookseller, 6 copies. 
 Ewer, Samuel, Esq. 
 Emery and Adams, Bristol. 
 Estlin, Rev. J. P. Bristol. 
 
 Frankland, William, Esq. 
 
 French, Nath. Bogle, Esq. 
 
 Fowle, William, M. D. Hungerford. 
 
 Forbes, James, Esq. Stanmore. 
 
 Ford, Thomas, Esq. 
 
 Fry, Nicholas Lacy, Esq. New Court House, Topshara. 
 
 Fry, Anna, Bristol. 
 
 Fry, Joseph Storrs, ditto. 
 
 Fry, William Storrs, Mildred's Court. 
 
 Fry, John, junior, South Street, Finsbury. 
 
 French, P. W. Reading. 
 
 Flower, B. Cambridge, 2 copies. 
 
 Fardon, William, Reading. 
 
 Garthshore, Maxwell, M.D. F.R.S. F.A.S. F.R.S. Edinb. 
 
 Galton, Samuel, F.R.S. Birmingham. 
 
 Giddy, Davies, Esq. F. R. S. 
 
 Gilpin, Joshua. 
 
 Glaister, Samuel. 
 
 Grant, Andrew, Esq. Fenchurch Street. 
 
 Henniker Major, John, Esq. M. P. F.R. S. F.A.S. 
 
 Henley, Rev. Samuel, M.A. F.A.S. 
 
 Hood, John, Esq. Newington Green. 
 
 Holloway, Thomas, ditto. 
 
 Hollo way, John. 
 
 Hazard, Samuel, Bath, 6 copies. 
 
 Harford, Richard, Esq. F.A.S. 
 
 Harford, Joseph, Esq. Bristol. 
 
 Heydinger, Charles, Plumtree Street. 
 
 Hobson, William, Esq. Stamford Hill. 
 
 Holt, Daniel, printer, Newark. 
 
 Hough,
 
 SUBSCRIBERS. xxxiii 
 
 Hough, Thomas, Esq. Percy Street. 
 Hancock, Joseph, Basinghall Street. 
 Harwood, John, Esq. Dean, Hants. 
 How, Richard, Woburn, Bedfordshire. 
 Hodgkin, John, Pentonville. 
 Hill, John, L.L.D. University, Edinburgh. 
 
 Jermyn, George, Ipswich. 
 
 Jones, Joseph, printer, London. 
 
 Johnson, Edward, Whitechapel Road. 
 
 Juitt, George, Caddick's Row, Whitechapel. 
 
 Irton, Edmund Lamplugh, Esq. Irton Hall, Cumberland. 
 
 Kirkpatrick, Thomas, Esq. Hamburgh. 
 Kettle, Godfrey, Esq. Gower Street. 
 Knowles, George, Ely Place. 
 King, Thomas, junior, bookseller. 
 
 Lefevre, Charles Shaw, Esq. M. P. F.R.S. F.A.S, 
 
 Lettsom, J.C. M.D. F.R.S. F.A.S. 
 
 Lane, Edward, Esq. Basingstoke. 
 
 Lewis, William, Esq. 
 
 Lee, Captain. 
 
 Lunn, W. H. Cambridge, 6 copies. 
 
 Lee, John, Hatton Garden. 
 
 Lawson, Sir Wilfrid, Bart. Brayton, Cumberland. 
 
 Lackington, Allen and Co. 6 copies. 
 
 Marsh, Charles, Esq. F. A.S. M. R. I. A. 
 
 Marsden, William, Esq. L.L.D. F.R.S. F.A.S. M.R.I.A. 
 M. Asiat. S. 
 
 Morton, Charles, M.D. F.R.S. F.A.S. &c. 
 
 Mason, Rev. Henry Cox, A. M. Bermondsey. 
 
 Maltby, Rev. , Norwich. 
 
 Marsh, Rev. T. Orlebar, F. L. S. Vicar of Stevington, Bed- 
 fordshire. 
 
 More,
 
 xxxiv SUBSCRIBERS. 
 
 More, Samuel, Esq. Adelphi. 
 Mainstone, James, Esq. Essex Street. 
 
 Morgan, , Esq. Southgate. 
 
 Martyn, Thomas. 
 Morton, William, Shoe Lane. 
 Meredith, Thomas, Crescent, Kingsland. 
 Mountford, Richard, Esq. Barbican. 
 
 Northumberland, Duke of, F. R.S. F.A.S. 
 Nichols, John, Esq. F. A. S. Edinburgh and Perth, 
 Noble, Richard, printer, London. 
 Newenham, George, Esq. Cork. 
 
 Ouseley, Major, Upper Norton Street. 
 
 Prime, Samuel, Esq. F.R.S. F.A.S. 
 
 Person, Richard, Esq. Greek Professor, Cambridge, 
 
 Pearson, George, M. D. F.R.S. 
 
 Paynter, F. Esq. Trekenning, Cornwall. 
 
 Pole, Thomas, surgeon, Leadenhall Street. 
 
 Prichard, Thomas, Bristol. 
 
 Pine, William, ditto. 
 
 Phillips, James, George Yard. 
 
 Phillips, William, ditto. 
 
 Phillips, John, engraver. 
 
 Paas, Cornelius, Holborn, 
 
 Ray, Robert, Esq. New Court House, Topsham, 
 Ridout, J. G. 33, Paternoster Row. 
 Ring, Thomas, surgeon, Reading. 
 Reynolds, Deborah, Clapham. 
 Reynolds, Thoma.s, Carshalton. 
 Reynolds, William Foster, Clapham, 
 Reynolds, Jacob Foster, Carfhalton. 
 Rpsser, Robert, Bristol, 
 
 Spenceri
 
 SUBSCRIBERS. xxxv 
 
 Spencer, Earl, F.R.S. F.A.S. Trust. Br. Mus. 
 
 Stamford and Warrington, Earl of. 
 
 Sulivan, Rich. Jos. Esq. M.P. F.R.S. F.A.S. 
 
 Strahan, Andrew, Esq. M. P. 
 
 Society for the encouragement of Arts, Manufactures, and 
 
 Commerce. 
 
 Smirnove, Rev. J. Chaplain to the Russian Ambassador. 
 Saunders, George, Esq. 
 Sims, James, M. D. Lawrence Lane. 
 Smith, Thomas WoodroufFe, Great Saint Helens. 
 Stuart, Charles, Tower Street. 
 Sael, George, bookseller. 
 Sabine, Thomas, priqter. 
 Stephenson, Simon, Esq. Great San&uary, 
 Shipley, Richard, Esq. Horsleydovyn, 
 Sibly, Ebenezer, M. D. , : . : ! 
 Simpson, Robert, Bristol. 
 
 Stackhouse, John, Esq. F. L. S. Pendarvis, Cornwall, 
 Steele, Isaac, Type Street. 
 Skirven, John, printer, London. 
 Smeeton, Joseph, printer, London. 
 Stewart, James, perfumer, Broad Street. 
 
 Trinity College, Cambridge. 
 
 Tooke, Rev. William, F. R. S. Member of the Imperial Aca- 
 
 demy of Sciences, and of the free Economical Society at 
 
 Petersburgh. 
 
 Thomason, Rev. Thomas, A. M. Cambridge. 
 Tomlins, T. E. Esq. Inner Temple. 
 Terrett, William, L.L.D. Bettor's Commons. 
 Thomas, W. H. surgeon, Basingstoke. 
 Taylor, Josiah, Architectural Library, Holborn, 
 
 Valangin, F. de, M. D. Fore Street. 
 Valpy, Richard, D. D, Reading. 
 Vansittart, N. Esq, 
 
 West,
 
 xxxvi SUBSCRIBERS. 
 
 West, Benjamin, Esq. President of the Royal Academy. 
 
 Walker, John, Esq. F.R.S. F.A.S. 
 
 Wilkins, Charles, Esq. F.R.S. M.AsIat.S. 
 
 Ware, John, printer of the Cumberland Pacquet, Whitehaven, 
 
 6 copies. 
 
 White, Sampson, Esq. Gough Square. 
 Whitmarsh, George, surgeon, Wilton. 
 Workman, M. surgeon, Basingstoke. 
 Walford, Thomas, Esq. Whitley Birdbrook. 
 Williams, Rev. J. Basingstoke. 
 Woolston, T. Adderbury. 
 Wilkinson, Thomas, Esq. Barbican. 
 Wilkes, John, Esq. Mllland-house, Sussex. 
 Wilkes, John, junior, Esq. Inner Temple. 
 Watts, Joseph, printer^ Gosport. 
 Windover, Nicholas, Basingstoke. 
 Were, Robert, Garratt, Surry. 
 Were, William, Wandsworth. 
 Were, Samuel, Union Street, Southwark. 
 Wilson, Andrew, printer, London. 
 
 Young, Thomas, M.D, F.R.S.
 
 PANTOGRAPHIA.
 
 ABYSSINIAN. 
 
 Abbahn schirfifu. Selenskgi zebonsha. Meff- 
 haq spirsa. Ischir jergash. Semskan hirman 
 egahquahn. Parchon pmlegron; ha parchons 
 phlegonaos. Ne hibli kan scepi kha. Erupn 
 ihapsa. Abbahn schirfifu. Selenskgi zebon- 
 sha, Meffahq spirsa. Ischir jergash. Semskan 
 hirman egahquahn. Parchon pmlegron. 
 
 AMHARIC. 
 
 Abatatyn bassamaj jalach. Jynzalyn mangys- 
 tcha. Fakadychm jyhuyn bassamaj yndalach- 
 schig bamydram. Sisajatyn yjaylatu zare sy- 
 tan. Badalatyn myharan ynjam jabadalanan 
 yndo nymhyr. Hamansut nygaba matan at- 
 tawan. Adhanan yndu kabis nagar. Ysma 
 ziaka jyy'ti mengy'st hajl wasybhat laalama a 
 
 ANGOLAN. 
 
 Tola a monte. 1. Hosa azure. 2. Macla 
 agisa. 3. Anfonsa ara quereola azureta o 
 amano. 4. Afonnimonte iouro toma mon- 
 tiouro a fauco. 5. O augamont plecha mon 
 almont augumos plechomont. 6. Ouan- 
 mont-cault plutech. 7. Si auermont moiue. 
 Amin.
 
 ABYSSINIAN. 
 
 This is the language of one of the provinces of Ethiopia, 
 of which there are many, all varying much in their dialect, 
 but using the same character. See ETHIOPIC. 
 
 The fpecimen given is a version of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 26. 
 
 AMHARIC. 
 
 This is also one of the provincial tongues of Ethiopia, 
 which are particularly noticed in Bruce's Travels, vol. 1, 
 p. 401. It is a version of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 15. 
 
 ANGOLAN. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 2
 
 ARABIC 1. 
 
 lei tchzvhdgba 
 
 ch th tz sc r k ts ph hh s n m 
 
 la gc thz dz dh 
 ARABIC 2. 
 
 J _* k_> X j 
 
 B 
 
 D 
 
 (ja. 
 
 S 
 
 D Ch 
 
 Hh 
 
 (^^ y-** />J / 
 
 Sj S Z R 
 
 Ai 
 
 J, ,5 X J eC 
 
 L C 
 
 DTD 
 
 uJ 6 X S *Ji o i 3 
 
 K F 
 
 H 
 
 W 
 
 N 
 
 M
 
 ARABIC 1. 
 
 The most ancient Arabic Letters are the Kufic, so named 
 from the City of Kufa on the Euphrates ; (Encyc. Franc, 
 des Alph. anc. et mod. PI. 3.) but they do not appear to be 
 in use at this time."~~This alphabet was communicated to 
 Dr. Morton of the British Museum, by Dr. Hunt, Hebrew 
 and Arabic Professor at Oxford, from the Bodleian Library. 
 
 Dr. Morton's Tables. 
 
 ARABIC 2. 
 
 These modern Characters are the invention of the Vizier 
 Molach, who flourished about 933 of the Christian ^Era, 
 with which he wrote the Koran three times, and in a man- 
 ner so fair and correct, as to be considered a perfect model 
 of writing it. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 278. 
 
 This is the common character of the TURKS and PER- 
 SIANS, but these people have five more letters than the 
 ARABS, (Fourn. v. 2. p. 278J which I shall give in their 
 proper places. This is the alphabet in present use, in 
 which are expressed the Initials, Medials, and Finals ; with 
 their powers subjoined.
 
 ARABIC 3. 
 
 1. 
 
 Olfl 2. 
 
 liisl? iL : iif iILl 4. 
 
 O- JO - 
 
 UTULlki UJjir^ 5 
 LiLoJ ij 6. 
 
 ARABIC 4. 
 
 ch 
 
 v hdg ba 
 
 hhs n ml cit 
 
 thz dz dh sc r k ts ph
 
 ARABIC 3. 
 
 Is the Lord's Prayer in the same character, of which the 
 literal reading is to be seen in No. 6. 
 
 Oral. Dora, p. 16, 
 
 ARABIC 4. 
 
 Or Maurltanian. This alphabet is used in Morocco and 
 Fez, and the northern parts of Africa. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 279.
 
 ARABIC 5. 
 
 lei tchzvhdgba 
 
 #;*#"* 4*0 CW^.P 
 
 gc tz dz sc r k ts ph hh s n m 
 
 dh ch th tz 
 
 ARABIC 6. 
 
 Ya Abanalladi phissamawati. Yatakaddasu 
 smoca. Tati malacutoca. Tacuno mashiatoca 
 Cama phissamai wa ala'l ardi. Chubzana'Iladi 
 lil gadi ahtinaol yaum. Waghphir lana ma a- 
 leina. Cama naghphiro nahno liman lana al- 
 cihi. Wala tudkilna hagiarib. Lakin naggina 
 minnash shirriti. Lianna leka'lmulka, va'lkou 
 
 ARMENIAN 1. 
 
 t? Z- 
 
 bgdiez eethji 1 
 
 u F ^^asuTj^L^ 
 
 ch dz k h ds gh tc m i n sch p 
 
 r^LrLutin t f T f> 
 
 o tch dch rr s w t r ts y ph f
 
 ARABIC 5. 
 
 Known by the general name of African. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 279. 
 
 ARABIC 6. 
 
 The literal reading of the Lord's Prayer, which is in 
 the original character in No. 3. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 43,5. 
 
 ARMENIAN 1. 
 
 The Armenian language approaches near to the Chaldean 
 and Syriac ; many parts of it are common with other ori- 
 entals, the Greek, and that of the Gauls, which renders 
 the pronunciation difficult. It is used, not only in Great 
 and Little Armenia, but in Asia Minor, Syria, Tartary, 
 Persia, and other nations. Duret, p. 725. 
 
 This is the character used for the fine printing of this 
 language. 
 
 Dr. Morton's Tables.
 
 10 
 
 ARMENIAN 2. 
 
 a bgdieze ethj ich 
 
 ?h<l1*?<WQ\>(\'Z 
 
 dz k h ds gh tc m i n sch o tch 
 
 ii&mj^sp8M>^cft 
 
 p dch rr s w t r ts y ph kh f 
 
 ARMENIAN 3. 
 
 abgdiezeethj i 1 
 
 Mr% * &^t/->^2> 
 
 ch dz k h ds gh tc m i n sch o 
 
 tch p dch rr s w t r ts y ph kh 
 
 ARMENIAN 4. 
 
 ^ a t r # >> f i 
 
 abgdiezeethj i 1 
 
 fc &K A 5 xs J*J X t 4 * 
 
 ch dz k h ds gh tc m i n sch o 
 
 L ? I* 1 -*" <r*tf *f /<* X 
 
 tch p dch rr s w t r ts y ph kh
 
 11 
 
 ARMENIAN 2. 
 
 This letter was used to ornament the frontispieces and 
 titles of books; also for public inscriptions, whence the 
 French have given it the name of Lapidaire. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 2y6. 
 
 ARMENIAN 3. 
 
 These are the capital letters of their common writing, 
 taken from their books. Some authors suppose that this 
 character was invented by St. Chrysostom, who was ba- 
 nished by the Emperor, from Constantinople into Armenia, 
 where he died. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 276. 
 
 ARMENIAN 4. 
 
 The lower- case alphabet, or small letters to the preceding. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 276.
 
 12 
 
 ARMENIAN 5. 
 
 ab gdiezej 
 
 th j i 1 ch dz k h 
 
 ds h tc m i n sch t 
 
 tsch p dsch rr s w t 
 
 ts y ph kh f o 
 ARMENIAN 6. 
 
 abgdiezej thzil 
 
 e ds q h x gl gh m i n sh o 
 
 z p sc rh s w t r tz y ps ch
 
 13 
 
 ARMENIAN 5. 
 
 These letters are termed blooming or flowery, and are 
 used in titles of books, and as two-line letters in the be- 
 ginnings of chapters. They represent flowers, and the fi- 
 gures of men and animals, and in shape are formed like the 
 Lapidairf, No. 2. 
 
 Encyc. Fr. pi. 12 and 13. 
 
 ARMENIAN 6. 
 
 In Schroder's Thesaurus Linguae Armenicae, the French 
 Encyclopedic in folio, and other books, we meet with 
 the five preceding Armenian alphabets only, but Duret 
 gives this as the first used by this people, taken from the 
 letters of an inscription over a large entrance into the castle 
 of Curcho. 
 
 Duret, p. 725.
 
 14 
 
 ARMENIAN 7. 
 
 Hair mer or iercins des. Surb eglizzianun 
 cho. Eceszzae archaiuthai cho. Eglizzin cam 
 cho. Orpes jercins en jercri. Zhazt mer ha- 
 napazord rue mez aisaur. Eu thogl mez zpa- 
 artis mer. Orpas eu mech thoglumch merozt 
 partpanazt. Eu mi tanir zmezi phorxuthai. 
 Ail pharceai zmez izarae. Amin. 
 
 AREMORICAN 1. 
 
 Hon tat pehing son in acou'n. Oth hano be- 
 zet san&ifiet. De vel de ompho rouantelez. 
 Ha volonte bezet gret voar an douar evel en 
 coun. Roit dezomp hinou hor bara bemdezi- 
 er, ha pardon nil dezomp hon offancon evel 
 ma pardon nomp d'ac re odeus hon offancet. 
 Ha n'hon digait quel e tentation. Hogen de 
 livrit a drove. Amen. 
 
 AREMORICAN 2. 
 
 Hon tad pehudij sou en efaou, da hanou be- 
 zet san&ifiet. Devet aornomp da rouantelaez 
 Da eol bezet graet en douar, eual maz eon en 
 euf. R6 dimp hyziou hon bara pemdeziec. 
 Pardon dimp hon pechedou, eual ma pardo- 
 nomp da nep pegant ezomp offanzet. Ha na 
 dilaes quet a hanomp en temptation. Hoguen
 
 15 
 
 ARMENIAN 7. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 AREMORICAN 1. AND 2. 
 
 Two versions of the Lord's prayer, formerly used in that 
 part of France called Aremorica; (Orat. Dom. p. 51,) 
 lately Brittany, or Bretagne ; but now forming the five 
 departments of the North-coast, Finisterre, Ilk and Vil- 
 taine, Lower Loire, and Morblham.
 
 16 
 
 ATOOI 
 
 Tehaia 
 
 Where 
 
 He oho 
 
 The hair 
 
 E poo 
 
 The head 
 
 Matta 
 
 The eye 
 
 Haieea 
 
 Fish 
 
 Waheine 
 
 A woman 
 
 Haire 
 
 Togo 
 
 Tooanna 
 
 A brother 
 
 Erooi 
 
 To puke 
 
 Too 
 
 Sugar cane 
 
 My, ty 
 
 Good 
 
 Matou 
 
 I 
 
 Oohe 
 
 Yams 
 
 Booa 
 
 A hog 
 
 Tanata 
 
 A man 
 
 Pahoo 
 
 A drum 
 
 Eeneeoo 
 
 Cocoa nuts Ehoora 
 
 A dance 
 
 Eroemy 
 
 Fetch it 
 
 Ooroo 
 
 Breadfruit 
 
 Matte 
 
 Dead 
 
 Aoonai 
 
 Presently 
 
 Paha 
 
 Perhaps 
 
 Ai 
 
 Yes 
 
 Noona 
 
 Above 
 
 Poore 
 
 A prayer 
 
 Tahouna 
 
 A priest 
 
 Aiva 
 
 A harbour 
 
 Motoo 
 
 An island 
 
 Hai, raa 
 
 The sun 
 
 Hairanee 
 
 The sky 
 
 Harre 
 
 A house 
 
 Eatooa 
 
 A god 
 
 Homy 
 
 Give me 
 
 BALI. 
 
 ca kha kha ga ta da ta 
 
 na tha da ba ua ka kaa ki 
 
 1234567 89
 
 17 
 ATOOI. 
 
 Is one of the Sandwich Islands in the South Seas, disco- 
 vered by Captain Cook ; they consist of a group, extend- 
 ing in lat. from 18 54' to 22 15' north; and in long. 
 from 199 36' to 205 9 6' east. This specimen of the 
 language is taken from the vocabulary. 
 
 Cook's laft Voy. vol. 3. p. 549. 
 
 BALI. 
 
 Is an island north of Java, populous and abounding 
 with rice and fruits. Lat. 7 10' fouth; long. 215 50' 
 eaft. 
 
 This character is taken from the Encyc. Franc, des Alph. 
 anc. et mod. pi. 21.
 
 18 
 
 BASTARD. 
 
 be defg h 
 
 MlfOhit/ltt^o^m 
 
 i k 1 m n o p q 
 
 r s t uvxyz& 
 BENGALLEE. 
 
 tho to iun zho z5 sho so uang 
 
 gho g5 kho ko bho bo pho no 
 
 B 
 
 dho do tho to ano dho do khio 
 
 BERRYAN. 
 
 Nouestre pere que sias dins Fou Ciel, vouestre 
 nom siet santifia. Oue vouestre royame nous 
 arribe. Que vouestre volonta siet fache, a la 
 comme a ou Ciel. Dona nous aujourdhuy 
 nuestre pan quotidien. Et perdona nos nues- 
 tros offenses, como nos outros pardonem a na 
 quoties que nous en offensa. Et ne nous lais-
 
 19 
 BASTARD. 
 
 This letter was in common use in France in the 14th and 
 15th centuries, and called Bastard, or Mongrel, being de- 
 rived from the Lettres de forme, which it resembles, but 
 has most of its angles cut off, or much lessened. It was 
 first made by a German, named Heilmann, in 1490. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 265. 
 
 BENGALLEE. 
 
 This is the character used in the extensive country of 
 Bengal, now subject to the English East-India Company. 
 It was copied from pi. 18 of the Encyc. Franc, des Alph. 
 anc. et mod. 
 
 BERRYAN. 
 
 Berry was a province of France, but now forms the two 
 departments of Cher and Indre ; it is very fertile in corn, 
 wine, fruits, hemp, and flax. 
 
 The specimen given is the Lord's Prayer, (Orat. Dom. 
 p. 39,) which seems to be only a dialect of the French.
 
 20 
 
 BlSCAYAN. 
 
 Cure aita cerue tan aicena. Sanctifica bedi 
 hire ieena. Et hoz bedi hire rehuma. Eguin 
 bedi hire vozondatea cervan be cala lurrean 
 ere. Cure egoneco oguia igue egun. Eta quit 
 ta jetrague gure cozrac: Nola gucre gure 
 cozduney quittatzen baitra vegu. Eta ezgai 
 zalasar eracitenta tentacione tan. Baima de- 
 libza gaitzac gaich totic. 
 
 BOHEMIAN. 
 
 Otozie nass genz syna nebesich. Oszwiet se 
 meno twe. Przid kralowstwii twe. Bud wule 
 twa. Yakona nebi tak y na zeni. Chleb nasz 
 wezdeyssi dey nam dnes. Yodpust nam nasse 
 winy. Yako y my odpaustime nassim wini- 
 kom. Y ne uwod nasz do pokussenii. Ale 
 zbaw nas od zleho. 
 
 ANCIENT BRITISH 1. 
 
 Eyen taad rhuvn wytyn y neofoedodd ; San- 
 teiddier yr hemuv tau : De vedy dyrnas dau: 
 Guueler dy wollys arryddayar megis agyn y 
 nefi. Eyn bara beunydda vul dyro inniheddi- 
 vu: Ammaddeu ynny evn deledion, megis 
 agi maddevu in deledvvir ninaw : Agna tho- 
 wys ni in brofedigaeth : Namyn gvvaredni
 
 21 
 
 Bl SCAYAN. 
 
 Biscay is a province of Spain, but the language seems 
 not to have any affinity to that of the nation. The Biscay - 
 ers are of Celtic extraction, and still preserve their pecu- 
 liar language, the Basque, which is different from any other 
 in Europe. 
 
 Walker's Gazetteer. 
 
 The specimen given is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 BOHEMIAN. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 ANCIENT BRITISH 1. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 50.
 
 ANCIENT BRITISH 2. 
 
 Ein tad yr hwn wytl yn y nesoedd. Sanftedi- 
 dier dy enw. Deued dy deyrnas. Bid dy ew- 
 yllys ar yddaiar, megis y mae yn y nefoed. 
 Dyro i ni heddyw ein bara beunyddiol, amad 
 deu i ni ein dyledion, fel a maddeuwn ni in 
 dyledwgr. Ac nac arwain ni i brofe digaeth. 
 Eithr gwared ni rhag drwg. Amen. 
 
 BULGARIAN. 
 
 ab vgdexz 
 
 * fcr eft ?? 3 8 <F 
 
 dzi kl mno p 
 
 r s t y f ps sch ia 
 
 BULLANTIC. 
 
 B C D 
 
 G H I K L M 
 
 n-o- fl- 
 
 N O P Q R
 
 23 
 ANCIENT BRITISH 2. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, given as more modern than the 
 former. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 BULGARIAN. 
 
 Bulgaria is a province of Turkey ; the character favors 
 much of the Illyrian, (Fourn. v. 2. p. 275,) but the dialect 
 K Sclavonian. 
 
 BULLANTIC* 
 
 Capital ornamented letters in use for the dispatch of the 
 Apoftolic Bulls. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 269.
 
 24 
 
 CADEAUX. 
 
 -e 
 
 BCDEGH 
 
 KLM NOP Q 
 
 , -fcl? 96 2 3 
 
 R S T V X Y Z 
 
 GARNISH. 
 
 Ozha nash kir si v'nebesih. Posvezhenu bodi 
 iime tvoie. Pridi k'nam kraylestvu tvoie. S'i- 
 dise volia tvoia. Kakor nanebi taku nasemlij. 
 Kruh nash usak dainii dai nam dones. Inu 
 odpusti nam dulge nashe. Kakor tudi mi od- 
 pustimo dulshnikom nashim. Inu neupelai 
 nas v'iskushno. Tamazh reshi nass od slega. 
 Sakai tvoje je krailestvu, muzh, zhhast veko- 
 
 CATALONIAN. 
 
 Pare nostro, que estau en lo eel. San&ificat 
 sea el vostre sant nom. Vinga en nos altres 
 el vostra saint reine. Fasas la vostra voluntat, 
 axi en la terra como se fa en lo eel. El pa 
 nostre de cada dia da nous lo gui. I perdo- 
 nau nos nostres culpes ; axi como nos altres 
 perdonam a nostres deudores. I no permetau
 
 25 
 CADEAUX. 
 
 Capital flourishing letters used in ancient French writ- 
 ings of the 5th century. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 269. 
 
 GARNISH. 
 
 Or, of the Carni, inhabitants of CARNIOLA, a province 
 of Germany. 
 
 This is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess, p. 435. 
 
 CATALONIAN. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 36.
 
 26 
 
 CELTIC. 
 
 J S e guth anaim mo ruin a tha 'nn, 
 O! 's ainmach gu aislin Mhalmhin' thu, 
 Fosgluibh-se talla nan speur, 
 Aithra Oscair nan cruaidh-bheum ; 
 Fosgluibh-se doirsa nan nial, 
 Tha ceumma Mhalmhine go dian. 
 Chualam guth a' m' aislin fein, 
 Tha fathrum mo chleibh go ard. 
 C' uime thanic an Ossag a' m' dheigh 
 O dhubh-shiubhal na linne od thall ? 
 
 Bha do sgiath shuimnach ann gallan aon- 
 Shiubhall aislin Mhalmhine go dian, aich, 
 Ach chunic is' a run ag aomadh, 
 'S a cheo-earradh ag aomadh m' a chliabh: 
 Bha dearsa na greine air thaobh ris, 
 Co boisgal ri or nan daimh. 
 
 'S e guth anaim mo ruin a tha 'nn, 
 O! 's ainmach gu m' aislin fein thu. 
 'S comhnuidh dhuit anam Mhalmhine, 
 Mhic Ossain is treine lamh. 
 
 CERAM. 
 
 Oeenta Olooa Otoloo Opatoo Oleema 
 12345 
 
 Oloma Opeeto Oaloo Oteeo Opooloo 
 "6 7 8 9 10
 
 27 
 CELTIC. 
 
 This language, under all it's disadvantages from the sub- 
 jecting powers of Greece and Rome; and afterwards from 
 Saxon innovations in this country, is still spoken with 
 much purity upon a great part of the continent, and in 
 the islands of Scotland ; and it exists at this day one of 
 the greatest living monuments of antiquity. 
 
 The annexed specimen of it is taken from Malvina s 
 Dream, by OSSIAN, of which the following is a transla- 
 tion in English. 
 
 Shaw's Anal. p. 157. 
 
 TRANSLATION: 
 
 " It was the voice of my love! few are his visits to the 
 Dreams of Malvina! Open your airy halls, ye fathers of 
 mighty Toscar! unfold the gates of your clouds. The steps 
 
 * of Malvina's departure are nigh. I have heard a voice in 
 
 < my dream. I feel the fluttering of my soul. Why didst thou 
 ' come, O blast, from the dark rolling of the lake ? Thy rust- 
 { ling was in the trees, the dream of Malvina departed. But 
 ' she beheld her love, when his robe of mist flew on the wind ; 
 the beam of the sun was on his skirts, they glittered like the 
 
 * gold of the stranger. It was the voice of my love ; few are 
 
 < his visits to Malvina. 
 
 " But thou dwellest in the soul of Malvina, son of mighty 
 
 < Ossian." 
 
 CERAM 
 
 Is one of the Molucca isles. Sydney Parkinson gives 
 the annexed vocabulary of numeration, but is silent as to 
 
 their general language. 
 
 P. 200.
 
 28 
 
 CHALDEAN 1. 
 
 hh T. v hd gb a 
 
 o s n m 1 k i th 
 
 W H T,X o9 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 CHALDEAN 2. 
 
 hhzv hdg b a 
 
 [7 ^ ^ A9 > O ^ ^ 
 
 o s n m 1 k i th 
 
 :E ^^ 3>^> rs 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 CHALDEAN 3. 
 
 hhz vh dgba 
 
 3^^ 1^/V<^ 
 
 o s n m Ik i th 
 
 >r ^ T ^ ? 
 
 t sch r q ts p
 
 29 
 CHALDEAN. 
 
 CHALDEA, or BABYLONIA, a kingdom of Asia, and 
 the most ancient in the world, was founded by Nimrod, 
 the son of Cush, and grandson of Ham, who, according 
 to some historians, built Nineveh, the capital of Assyria. 
 
 Philologists are much divided in their sentiments or opi- 
 nions, respecting the antiquity of this language. 
 
 Pliny informs us, that Gellius attributed letters to the 
 Egyptian Mercury, and others, to the Syrians. 
 
 The learned Roman just mentioned, supposed that the 
 Assyrian letters were prior to any record of history, and 
 by these he undoubtedly meant the Chaldean : it should 
 seem most probable, that the language used by the ante- 
 diluvian Patriarchs, bore the greatest analogy to this, es- 
 pecially when it is universally allowed that they inhabited 
 that part of the globe, whence many have thought the 
 Chaldean to have been prior to the Samaritan and Hebrew. 
 
 See PREFACE. 
 CHALDEAN 1. 
 
 Called Ccelestlal; said to have been composed by the 
 ancient astrologers, from the figures of certain stars ; and 
 represented in two hemispheres. Gaffarel, p. 1. 
 
 CHALDEAN 2. 
 
 Theseus Ambrosius asserts, that this character was 
 brought from Heaven by the Angel RAPHAEL, by whom 
 it was communicated to ADAM, who used it in composing 
 Psalms after his expulsion from the terrestrial paradise. 
 
 Some authors pretend that MOSES and the prophets used 
 this letter, and that they were forbidden to divulge it to 
 mortal men. Duret, p. 119. 
 
 CHALDEAN 3. 
 
 This character is also said to have been used by ADAM. 
 
 Spanh. Dissert, p. 80. 
 Dr. Morton's Tables.
 
 30 
 
 CHALDEAN 4. 
 
 17 ^1TJ7 C 1 
 
 v x y m *L e N ^ 
 
 CHALDEAN 5. 
 
 hh z v h d g b 
 
 ^73 h 3 /- > 'V <2p 
 
 s n m 1 k i th 
 
 -4 >T T P T ? 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 CHALDEAN 6. 
 
 hhzvhdgba 
 
 aa s n m 
 
 1 k i th 
 
 A/ W f 
 
 t sch r q ts p
 
 / , 31 
 
 CHALDEAN 4. 
 
 Brought from the Holy Land to Venice, when the 
 christfan princes made war against the infidels; this is a 
 handsome letter, and it is said, was the same that SETH 
 engraved upon the two columns, mentioned in chap. 4 of 
 the first book of Josephus. It it also said, that there 
 is, in Ethiopia, a treatise on divine subjects, written in 
 this character by ENOCH, which is preserved with great 
 care, and considered as canonical. 
 
 This is given as a Hebrew, but without any explanation 
 of the power of each letter. 
 
 Duret, p. 127. 
 
 CHALDEAN 5. 
 
 This character is said to have been used by NOAH. 
 
 Spanh. Dissert, p. 80. 
 
 CHALDEAN 6. 
 
 Attributed to NINUS, the first King of the Assyrians. 
 
 Spanh. Dissert, p. 80.
 
 32 
 
 CHALDEAN 7. 
 
 X *T 9( 4 
 
 hhz v hd 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 /" \ ^ .P 7 1 ? 2 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 CHALDEAN 8. 
 
 n i ^Ti 
 
 hhz vhdgba 
 
 jr \ >5 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 . a ^ ^ 'P V q 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 CHALDEAN 9. 
 
 m. v A N rr 
 
 hhz vhdgb 
 
 A" fHV H J J 
 
 o s n m 1 k i th 
 
 * x 
 
 .sch r q ts p ph
 
 33 
 CHALDEAN 7. 
 
 This is said to have been used by Abraham. 
 
 Spanh. Dissert, p. 80. 
 
 CHALDEAN 8. 
 
 Copied from ancient marbles brought from the Holy 
 Land, and are asserted to have been used by Abraham. 
 
 Duret, p. 126. 
 
 CHALDEAN 9. 
 
 This character is represented as the same on which the 
 tables of the law that were given to Moses, were written, 
 and are known to the Hebrews under the name of Mala- 
 chim, or Melachim. 
 
 Duret, p. 123.
 
 34 
 
 CHALDEAN 10. 
 
 * A 
 
 hhzvhdgb a 
 
 X 7 3 ^ 
 
 os n m 1 k i th 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 CHALDEAN 11. 
 
 ^K^a^if 
 
 hhzvhdgb 
 
 v / ^ 3 /: v N 
 
 gn s n m 1 k 
 
 d 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 CHALDEAN 12. 
 
 hh z v h d g b 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 >l JM IP 3 3 
 
 t sch r q ts p
 
 35 
 CHALDEAN 10. 
 
 Sigismond Fante says, that this alphabet is of very great 
 antiquity, having been used by the Hebrews in the wil- 
 derness, in the time of MOSES. 
 
 De Sivry's Recherches, p. 191. 
 
 Duret, p. 124, says, this character was given to ABRA- 
 HAM, when he departed from Chaldea for the Land of 
 Canaan. 
 
 CHALDEAN 11. 
 
 Fournier calls this a Phenician alphabet, but attributes 
 it to MOSES. 
 
 Vol. 2, p. 280. 
 
 CHALDEAN 12. 
 
 Or ancient Hebrew, which is also supposed to have been 
 used in the time of MOSES, and from which, most of the 
 other Chaldean alphabets are derived. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 280.
 
 36 
 
 CHALDEAN 13. 
 
 hhzvhdgba 
 
 4* X *C A *C 5 &J2 
 
 s n m 1 1 k i th 
 
 t sch r q ts p o 
 
 CHALDEAN 14. 
 
 hhzvhdba 
 
 s n ml k i th 
 
 7? 6 ^> *o ^7 ^ ^P 
 
 t sch r q ts p o 
 
 CHALDEAN 15. 
 
 hhz vhdgba 
 
 V % > A A 3V& 
 
 s n m 1 1 k i th 
 
 ^ A "V 0>^^e 
 
 t sch r q ts p o
 
 37 
 CHALDEAN 13. 
 
 This character is used by a nation of Mesopotamia, 
 called JSagadet, now under the Turkish dominion. 
 
 Duret, p. 345. 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 279. 
 
 CHALDEAN 14. 
 
 Theseus Ambrosius, in his treatise on various languages 
 and characters, calls this Judaic. 
 
 Duret, p. 335. 
 
 Fournier, v. 2. p. 279, fays, that it was used by the 
 Jews during their captivity in Babylon. 
 
 CHALDEAN 15. 
 
 This character was much used in Persia and Media, and 
 by the Jewish inhabitants of Babylon. 
 
 Duret, p. 344. 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 278.
 
 38 
 
 CHALDEAN 16. 
 
 a b g d ezh th 
 
 tr t* S A.5 8 2r 3 
 
 iklmnxo p 
 
 o- O& Uj^t 6 C ?C 
 
 r s t u ph ch ps 6 
 
 CHALDEAN 17. 
 
 P S, Z 7 
 
 v zvzd gve 
 
 a o > j< *> A^ 
 
 f pnl h ch t 
 
 trsrka s p 
 
 CHALDEAN 18.
 
 39 
 CHALDEAN 16. 
 
 This alphabet was found in the Grimani library at Venice, 
 and contrary to all other Chaldeans, is written from left 
 to right. 
 
 Some authors assert that this is the character of the Ma- 
 ronites, inhabitants of Asia, on the borders of the Red Sea. 
 
 Duret, p. 346. 
 
 CHALDEAN 17. 
 
 Jean Baptiste Palatin, a Roman citizen, in one of his 
 books in Italian, upon the manner of writing all sorts of 
 letters, both ancient and modern, gives this as an ancient 
 Chaldean. 
 
 Duret, p. 347. 
 
 CHALDEAN 18. 
 
 The copy of a Chaldean inscription, very curiously cut 
 
 in the square stones of the tower of Baych, over one of 
 
 the gates of the very ancient city of Panormus, in Sicily. 
 
 Fazelli Rer. Sicular, p. 149.
 
 40 
 
 CHALDEAN 19. 
 
 KZMD jraEa KIDS 
 Din 6 paan :*-*DYa 
 
 CHALDEAN 20. 
 
 Abhouna debhischmaija ; jithkaddasch sche- 
 mach; tethe malchouthach -, jeheveh tsibhja- 
 nach kma bhischmaija knema bh-ar-a; habh- 
 lan lahhma dmissetana bhjoma; uschebuk Ian 
 hhobai kma anan schbhakna behhai jabhai ; 
 v'al thaalan lenissajona; ella phza jathan min 
 bischa; m'toul dedhilach iteeh malchutha ve- 
 hhela vetheschbuhha 1'a'lmin. Amen. 
 
 CHARLEMAGNE 1. 
 
 ZJ -f >l 
 
 abed e fg h 
 
 TiTTimr JXVA 
 
 ik 1 mno 4 
 
 &
 
 41 
 CHALDEAN 19. 
 
 The Load's Prayer, 
 
 Orat. Dpm. p. 11. 
 
 CHALDEAN 20. 
 
 The literal version of the above. 
 
 Orat. Dora. p. It. 
 
 CHARLEMAGNE 1. 
 
 This great Emperor, who restored learning to Italy, 
 France, and Germany, encouraged the formation of good 
 letters in his dominions ; those in use having degenerated 
 into bad imitations of the shape of the Lombard, Saxon, 
 and Franco-Gallic. 
 
 These three alphabets are attributed to this monarch, and 
 bear his name ; they appeared early in the ninth century. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 272. 
 
 We observe that he did not think the distinction of ca- 
 pitals and small letters necessary in his alphabets.
 
 42 
 
 CHARLEMAGNE 2. 
 
 abcdefgh 
 
 ^X.^^^ V * 
 
 i k 1 m n o p q 
 
 r s t u x y z & 
 
 CHARLEMAGNE 3. 
 
 8. I 9 6 R^f X 
 
 abcdefg h 
 
 T 8 A. 3 9 <*> H 
 
 i k 1 m n o p q 
 
 rs tuxyz& 
 CHINESE 1. 
 
 Ngo tern fu che tsay thiaen. Ngo tern yuen 
 ul niun chim xim. Ul gue lin. Ul chi chim 
 him. Yu ty su sim thyaen. Ngo teng uwang 
 uul kyn jun ngo ngo zie Jong leang. Uul my 
 aen ong-o tsi ay. Ziu ngo ije ssa tou ngo tsi 
 ay tsie. Yeeu pu ngo chiu chi eu iu ieau can 
 Nay kyeea ngo yu chiu'o.
 
 43 
 CHARLEMAGNE 2 and 3. 
 
 See the last article. 
 
 CHINESE 1. 
 
 Version of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435.
 
 44 
 
 CHINESE 2. 
 
 tchi ma tai tche se vang 
 
 min ko tchoui tfeou tao yang 
 
 ting cao yu 196 hou yob 
 
 kou pieou tsing chin tchong lao 
 COPTIC 1. 
 
 7 f*J O "TT* 
 
 P Cv t3 s\^ 
 
 a bgdezsh 
 
 /^v> o -^y XT' ao err ci r~i 
 VA!, O \v> A. ^} OV o vJ 
 
 th i k 1 m n x o 
 
 p r s t y ph ch ps
 
 45 
 CHINESE 2. 
 
 , This language has no alphabet, being composed of a 
 great number of very limited sounds, and it would be im- 
 possible to understand it in any other character. It has but 
 328 sounds, and all monosyllables, applicable to 80,000 
 characters, of which this language is composed. 
 
 There are also 214 keys, or radical characters, the whole 
 of which are given, correctly and beautifully engraved, in 
 the Encyc. Franc, pi. 25, whence the annexed specimen 
 is copied. 
 
 COPTIC 1. 
 
 This character, which Fournier calls an ancient Coptic, 
 was used by the inhabitants of a city of Egypt, called 
 COPTOS ; whence the Cophtites derived their origin. They 
 were Christians, and flourished in great numbers in the time 
 of Dioclesian, who put many to death, and sent the rest 
 into exile. 
 
 V. 2. p. 274. 
 
 Duret, p. 755*
 
 46 
 
 COPTIC 2. 
 
 th i k 1 m 
 
 IIiTPp CcT*^r 
 
 p r s t u ph ch ps 
 
 COPTIC 3. 
 
 Theut habh atast en ornos. Plenspliah arich 
 eho. Abspinth bahl eho. Erup vlid heo ah 
 en orna, si ben isi. Beko bibh pueum, thet 
 hio memah. Fib affhla ihos gipsa hio; omsh 
 afflom gipsam hia. Sib auk quarb en zharaf- 
 hi, as afsh hio malach. Amin. 
 
 COPTIC 4. 
 
 Peniot etchennipheoui. Mareftoubonje pec- 
 ran. Maresinje tecme touro. Netehnacmar- 
 efshopi. Phredichentphenemhijenpicahi. Fe- 
 noiki terasti meifnanphoou. Ouohchanieter- 
 on nanebolmphretitio. Tenchoebol neete. 
 Ouo omper tenechou epirasmos. Alia nah 
 menebolch enpipethmou.
 
 47 
 COPTIC 2. 
 
 This character has a very great affinity to the Greek, 
 from which it evidently appears to have been formed, and 
 was introduced into Egypt, under the successors of Alex- 
 ander. The Coptic language, which is only to be met 
 with in the books of the Christians of Egypt, is a mixture 
 of the Greek, and the ancient Egyptian tongue, and was 
 used by them in their translations of the sacred writings, 
 church books, &c. 
 
 Enc. Franc, pi. 7. 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 274. 
 
 COPTIC 3. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 25. 
 
 COPTIC 4. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435.
 
 48 
 
 CORNISH. 
 
 Ny taz ez yn neau. Bonegas yw tha hanaw. 
 Tha Gwlakath doaz. Tha bonogath bogweez 
 en nore pocoragen neau. Roe thenyen dyth- 
 ma gon dyth bara givians. Ny gan rabn wee- 
 ry cara ny givians mens. O cabin ledia ny 
 nara idn tentation. Buz dilver ny thart doeg. 
 Amen. 
 
 CROATIAN. 
 
 Ozhe nash ishe efina nebesih. Svetise jme tu- 
 oe. Pridi cesa rastvo tvuoe. Budi volia tvoja 
 Jako na niebesih j tako nasemlij. Hlib nash 
 usag danni dai nam danas. Jodpusti nam dlgi 
 nashe. Jaco she imi odpushzhamo dishnikom 
 nashim. Ine isbavi nas od nepriasni. Dais ba- 
 vi nas od sla. 
 
 DALMATIAN 1. 
 
 rfi QU^ ffb 9 ffn 
 
 a bvgdexz 
 
 Bn V X FFPA.tfbJR Y 
 
 tz i i y k 1 m n 
 
 a F "K 3B $ 1J 
 
 p r s t u ph ch
 
 49 
 CORNISH. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 52. 
 
 CROATIAN. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 The character used by the Croats is the same as the IL- 
 LYRIAN 1, which see. 
 
 The languages of this people, the DALMATIANS, IL- 
 LYRIANS, SCLAVONS, &c., situated in this part of Europe, 
 are pronounced much like that of Italy. 
 
 DALMATIAN 1. 
 
 This character is said to have been invented by St. Je- 
 rom. It is very difficult to pronounce, yet many mis- 
 sals, and the breviary from the Latin ; and even the Old 
 and New Testaments, have been translated into it from the 
 Hebrew and Greek. 
 
 Duret, p. 738.
 
 50 
 
 DALMATIAN 2. 
 
 Otsce nas koyi-yessina nebissih. Szvetisse gy- 
 me tvoye. Pridi kralyess tvo tvoze. Budi vo- 
 lya tvoya: kako na nebu, tako ina zemlyi. 
 Kruh nas ssvagdanyni day nam danass. Jod 
 pussti naam duge nase. Kako i my odpusch- 
 yamo duxnikom nassim. Ine naass uvediu-na- 
 passt. Da osslobodi naas od assla. Amen. 
 
 DANISH. 
 
 Pader vor du som est i himmelen. Helligt 
 vorde dit naffn. Til komme dit rige. Borde 
 din billie ; saa paa jorden som hand er i him- 
 melen. Giff oz i dag vort daglige brod. Oc 
 forlad oz skyld; som wi forlade vore skylden- 
 er. Oc leed oz icke voi fristelse. Men frels oz 
 fra ont. Thi rigit er dit, oc krafft, oc herlig- 
 ved ewighed. Amen. 
 
 DOMESDAY. 
 
 cen inline tyj lecone. T. R,. B. 7 111 
 fe ^cffc f>. xi Ini. Tra. e. xi. car. In ^o 
 e una car. 7 JcV. uillt 7 xim. feori) cu. x. car. 
 Iti. in. lerui. j ti. molini ^c. VW. folid. 7 
 Vui. ac <^ti-filva <tp;v e in cbenu. Ricl?ar^> ^e 
 Tonenri^e ccn ^e roc tn una uir^acacn filva. 
 afcflnlic cufcicum ni it)i nvrnehac. No
 
 51 
 DALMATIAN 2. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 DANISH. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 55. 
 
 DOMESDAY. 
 
 This character was cut by the late ingenious Thomas 
 Cotterel, the letter founder, for the folio edition of Domes- 
 day book. 
 
 The specimen given is taken from Luckombe's history 
 of the origin and progress of printing; 8vo. Lond. 1770. 
 p. 174.
 
 52 
 
 HIGH DUTCH. 
 
 Unser Vater, der du bist im himmel, geheili- 
 get werd dein name. Zukomme dein reich. 
 Dein wille geschehe, wie im himmel also auch 
 auf erden. Unser taglich brodt gib uns heute. 
 Und vergib uns unser schuld, als wir verge- 
 ben unsern schuldigern. Unde fuhre uns nict 
 in versuchung. Sondern erlo se uns von dem 
 bosen. Den dein is das reich, und die krafft, 
 
 Low DUTCH 1. 
 
 Onse vader die in den hemelin ; uwen naem 
 werde geheylight; uw coninckrijcke icome; 
 uwen wille geschiede, gelijck in den hemel 
 oockop der aerden; ons daghelijcks broot 
 gheeft ons heden; ende vergheeft ons onse 
 scoulden, gelijck vock wy vergheven onsen, 
 schuldenaren ; ende en leydtons nict in ver- 
 
 Low DUTCH 2. 
 
 Onse Vader, die in de hemelin zyn uwen na- 
 am worde geheylight; uw'koningryk kome; 
 uwe wille geschiede gelyck in den hemel zoo 
 ook op den arden, ons dagelicks broot geef 
 ons heeden endevergeeft onse schulden gelyk 
 ook wy vergeeven onso schuldenaaren : ende 
 en laat ons neet in versoer kingemaer vertost 
 on van der hoosen. Amen.
 
 53 
 HIGH DUTCH. 
 
 Or the German, is a dialect of the Teutonic. 
 
 The specimen given is the Lord's Prayer in the modern 
 
 tongue. 
 
 Guthrie, p. 746. 
 
 Low DUTCH 1. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 This language is spoken in the Seven United Provinces, 
 and is compounded of the Teutonic, French, and Latin. 
 
 Guthrie, p. 728. 
 
 Low DUTCH 2. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, as spoken at the present time. 
 
 Guthrie, p. ?28.
 
 54 
 
 EGYPTIAN 1. 
 
 bcdefgh 
 
 tLVSbO 
 
 i k 1 m n o p 
 
 r s t v x y z th 
 
 EGYPTIAN 2. 
 
 bcde fgh 
 
 L^xS^O^T 
 
 i k 1 m n o p q 
 
 rs tvxyzth 
 
 EGYPTIAN 3. 
 
 b c d e f g n 
 
 ) <h* S V" YL K, A 
 
 i k 1 m n o p q 
 
 kA & ">? k Q, ^ 
 
 f^ G^ O> O ^Cn *J 
 
 r s t u x y
 
 55 
 EGYPTIAN 1. 
 
 The Egyptians, before their knowledge of letters and 
 characters, expressed their thoughts by the representation 
 of the forms of various animals, trees, plants, herbs, and 
 even of several of their own members, which they called 
 Hieroglyphic. They had also letters which were used by 
 the Ethiopians, approaching to the Hebrew, but we have 
 no certainty as to their language or writing. 
 
 Theseus Ambrosius, in his Appendice des langues 
 " Chaldaique, Syriaque, et Armenienne," gives this as the 
 most ancient Egyptian. 
 
 Duret, p. 380. 
 
 _, o 
 
 EGYPTIAN 2. 
 
 This is given, on the authority of Theseus, as the se- 
 cond Egyptian alphabet. 
 
 Duret, p. 381. 
 
 
 EGYPTIAN 3. 
 
 Fournier calls this Isiac-Egyptien, which, he informs 
 , is attributed to Isis, the Egyptian Goddess. 
 
 Vol. 2. p. 273.
 
 56 
 
 EGYPTIAN 4. 
 
 be de fgh 
 
 N k 1 m n o p q 
 r\ "Q 
 
 r s t u x y z 
 
 EGYPTIAN 5. 
 
 O 1L Tr& & T 
 
 abcde fgh 
 
 3 Z -L J=r ? rt & 
 
 i klmnopq 
 
 J n,.S A Z,^ a S 
 
 r stvxyzz 
 EGYPTIAN 6. 
 
 y -A 1 / v\ 
 
 aabdhvzhh 
 
 t * ^ -v o r 
 
 I m n s aa q 
 
 "p V V / 
 
 q r sh t
 
 57 
 EGYPTIAN 4. 
 
 Fournier calls this Lcttres Sacrees, and says they are at- 
 tributed to the Mercury Thot. 
 
 Vol. 2. p. 273. 
 
 EGYPTIAN 5. 
 
 This alphabet has generally been received as hierogly- 
 phic, according to Ambrosius, but there does not appear 
 sufficient reason for it. 
 
 Duret, p. 382. 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 273. 
 
 EGYPTIAN 6. 
 
 This alphabet was discovered by the late Abbe Barthe- 
 lemi, from whose sagacity and enquiries there can be no 
 doubt of it's being Egyptian ; and being found under a 
 monument in Egypt, had never been decyphered before. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. 5.
 
 58 
 
 EGYPTIAN 7. 
 
 hgfed cba 
 
 qponm 
 
 lki 
 
 th z yxutsr 
 
 NEW ENGLAND. 
 
 Nooshun kesukquot, quittiana tamunach koo 
 wesuonk; peyaumooutch kukketassootamo- 
 onk, kuttenantamoonk, nen nach ohkeit nean 
 kesukqut; nummeet uongash asekesukokish, 
 assamatineau yeuyeu kesukod; kah ahquon- 
 tamatinneau numat cheseongash, neane mat- 
 chenehu queagig nuta quontamounnonog ;
 
 59 
 EGYPTIAN 7. 
 
 This character is different from every other of this name, 
 being written from right to left. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 273. 
 
 EGYPTIAN 8. 
 
 Remarkable hieroglyphics engraved on the chair of a 
 colossal statue near LUXXOR and CARNAC. 
 
 Norden's Antiquities of Egypt and Nubia, v. 2. p. 1 1 1 . 
 
 NEW ENGLAND. 
 
 The Lord'vS Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435.
 
 60 
 
 ENGLISH-. 
 
 There is not, perhaps, any language in the world, which 
 has experienced so many revolutions as this ; and, like the 
 political constitution of the country, it seems to have gained 
 both strength and energy by every change. 
 
 \Ve may conclude, from Caesar's account of this island, 
 and it's inhabitants, that about the beginning of the Chris- 
 tian ./Era, the language of the ancient Britons was the 
 same, or very similar, to that of Gaul, or France, at that 
 time, and which is now believed to have been the parent 
 of the Celtic, Erse, Gaelic, or Welch; for the intercourse 
 between this island and Gaul, in Caesar's time, as well as 
 their relative situations, render it more than probable, that 
 Britain was peopled from that part of the continent, as both 
 Caesar and Tacitus affirm and prove, by many strong and 
 conclusive arguments. 
 
 There are now but few remains of the ancient British 
 tongue, except in Wales, Cornwall, the Isles and High- 
 lands of Scotland, part of Ireland, and some provinces of 
 prance ; which will not appear strange, when we consider 
 that Julius Caesar, some time before the birth of our Sa- 
 viour, made a descent on Britain ; and in the time of Clau- 
 dius, about A. D. 45, Aulus Plautius was sent over with 
 some Roman forces, who overcame the two kings of the 
 Britons, Togodumnus and Charactacus, when the southern 
 parts of the island were reduced to the form of a Roman 
 province ; after which, Agricola subdued the island, as far 
 as Scotland; whereupon a great number of the Britons re- 
 tired into Wales, Scotland, and the Isles, carrying their 
 language with them. The greatest part of Britain being 
 thus become a Roman province, the Legions who resided 
 in the island above 200 years, undoubtedly disseminated 
 the Latin tongue ; and the people being afterwards governed 
 by laws written in Latin, must necessarily create a mix- 
 ture of languages.
 
 61 
 ENGLISH. 
 
 Thus the British tongue continued, for some time, mixed 
 with the provincial Latin, 'till the Roman Legions being 
 called home, the Scots and Picts took the opportunity to 
 attack and harrass England : upon which,' Vortigern about 
 440, called the Saxons to his assistance, for which he re- 
 warded them with the Isle of Thanet, and the whole County 
 of Kent; but they growing powerful, and discontented, 
 dispossessed the inhabitants of all the country eastward of 
 the Severn ; by which means the Saxon language was in- 
 troduced. 
 
 In the beginning of the 9 th century, the Danes invaded 
 England, and became sole masters of it in about 200 years, 
 whereby the British language obtained a tincture of the 
 Danish ; but this did not make so great an alteration in 
 the Anglo-Saxon, as the revolution in 1066 by William 
 the First, who, as a monument of the Norman conquest, 
 and in imitation of other conquerors, endeavoured to make 
 the language of his own country as generally received as his 
 commands ; thus the ancient English became an entire 
 medley of Celtic, Latin, Saxon, Danish, and Norman-. 
 French. 
 
 Since the restoration of learning, the sciences have been 
 cultivated with such success in this island, that in astro- 
 nomy, anatomy, natural history, natural philosophy, che- 
 mistry, medicine, and the fine arts, innumerable terms 
 have been borrowed from that inexhaustible source, the 
 GREEK. Italy, Spain, Holland, and Germany, have also 
 contributed something, so that the present English may be 
 considered as a selection from all the languages of Europe. 
 
 The alphabets now in use will be found under the arti- 
 cles ROMAN and ITALIC.
 
 62 
 
 ENGLISH 1. 
 
 On ftaejie tibe J?e Irotan op 81^8111 
 pij? Romana pi ice gepm upahopon. ^ mij> he- 
 opia cynmgum. Raebjota anb Gallejiica pae- 
 pion hotne. Romane bujaij abjiaecon. ^ eall 
 Italia pice j5 ij- betpux J>am muntum tl 8ici- 
 lia ^am ealonbe in anpalb jejiehton. ^ J?a 
 aejteji }>am po^ej-ppecenan cynm^um De- 
 obpic peng to J?am ilcan jiice. j-e Deobjiic 
 paej: Smulm^a. he paep Erjiiften. J>eah he on 
 J?an T^jijiianij'can jebpolan ^ujihpunobe. ^e 
 genet Romanum hij- pjieonbj-cipe. j-pa j? hi 
 mojitan heojia ealbjiihta pyjVfte beon. 'Kc 
 he J>a jehat: j-pi^e ypele jelaej-te. "3 
 
 ENGLISH 2. 
 
 J?e ]cmj 8tephne opeji j-ge to 
 Nopmanbi. "3 ]?eji pej- unbeji-^an^en. jzo^i 
 ^ hi penben j? he j-culbe ben alpuic alj-e ]?e 
 eom pep. *U jroji he habbe jet hip tjiepoji. 
 ac he to-belb it ^ pcatejieb potlice. OQicel 
 habbe ^enjii Jcmj jabejieb jolb ^ pylueji. 
 anb na job ne bibe me poji hip paule J>api 
 op. Da J?e Junj 8tephne to Gnjla lanb com 
 J?a macob he hip jabepimj aet Oxene-popib. 
 ^ J>api he nam J>e bipcop Rojepi op 8epiep- 
 bepii. *3 TClexanbepi bipcop op Lincoln. ^ te 
 Gancelepi Rojepi hipe neuep. ^ bibe selle in
 
 63 
 ENGLISH 1. 
 
 Doctor Johnson, in his history of the English language, 
 being the preface to his Quarto Dictionary, 1785, gives 
 the annexed as the earliest specimen of it, taken from King 
 Alfred's Paraphrase, or imitation of Boethius, which is 
 here given in the Saxon character as used at that time. 
 
 See SAXON. 
 
 ENGLISH 2. 
 
 About 1150, in the reign of King Stephen, according 
 to Dr. Johnson, the Saxon language began to take the form 
 in which the present English was plainly discovered. The 
 specimen I have given is extracted from Gibson's Saxon 
 Chronicle, of the date of 1137, p. 238.
 
 64 
 
 ENGLISH 3. 
 
 Ure fadyr in heaven rich, 
 
 Thy name be hallyed ever lich, 
 
 Thou bring us thy michell blisse : 
 
 Als hit in heaven y doe, 
 
 Evar in yearth beene it also. 
 
 That holy bread that lasteth ay, 
 
 Thou send it ous this ilke day, 
 
 Forgive ous all that we have don, 
 
 As we forgivet uch other mon : 
 
 Ne let ous fall into no founding, 
 
 Ac shield ous fro the fowle thing. Amen. 
 
 ENGLISH 4. 
 
 Fadir ur that es in hevene, 
 Halud be thi Nam to nevene : 
 Thou do us thi rich rike, 
 Thi Will erd be wroght elk : 
 As it is wroght in Heven ay, 
 Ur ilk Day Brede give us to Day : 
 Forgive thou all us dettes urs 
 As we forgive till ur detturs 
 And ledde us in na fanding 
 But sculd us fra ivel Thing.
 
 65 
 ENGLISH 3. 
 
 About 1160, in the reign of King Henry II. the an- 
 nexed Lord's Prayer was rendered in rhyme, and sent from 
 Rome by Pope Adrian, an Englishman. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 7. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 68. 
 
 ENGLISH 4. 
 
 About 1250, in the reign of Henry III. we find it thus 
 rendered also in rhyme. 
 
 Martin's Inst. p. 15.
 
 66 
 
 ENGLISH 5. 
 
 Fader that art in heavin riche, 
 
 Thin helge nam it wurth the blisse, 
 
 Cumen and mot thy kingdom, 
 
 Thin holy will it be all don, 
 
 In heaven and in erdh also, 
 
 So it shall bin full well Ic tro. 
 
 Gif us all bread on this day, 
 
 And forgif us ure sinnes, 
 
 As we do ure wider winnes : 
 
 Let us not in fonding fall, 
 
 Oac fro evil thu syld us all. Amen. 
 
 ENGLISH 6. 
 
 Oure Fadir that art in Hevenes, halowid be 
 thi Name. Thi Kingdom come to. Be thi 
 Will doon in erthe as in hevene : Geve to us 
 this dai our breed over othir Substance. And 
 forgeve to us our dettis as we forgeven to our 
 dettouris. And lede us not into Temptacionn 
 but deliver us from yvel. Amen.
 
 67 
 ENGLISH 5. 
 
 In the year 1260, in the reign of King Henry III. the 
 annexed translation of the Lord's Prayer is also given in 
 
 rhyme. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 7. 
 
 ENGLISH 6* 
 
 This specimen of the gradual improvement of our lan- 
 guage, is handed to us from Wickliffe's translation of the 
 New Testament in the year 1380, and in the reign of 
 
 Richard II. 
 
 Martin s Inst. p. 15.
 
 68 
 
 ENGLISH 7. 
 
 Oure Fadir that art in Hevenes, halewid be thi 
 Name, thi Kingdom com to thee, be thi will 
 don in Eerthe as in Hevene, give to us this 
 Day oure Breed over othre Substanc; and 
 forgive to us oure Dettis, as we forgiven oure 
 Dettouris, and lede us not into Temptation, 
 but deliver us from ivel. Amen. 
 
 ENGLISH 8. 
 
 Our Father which art in Heven, halowed be 
 thy Name. Let thy Kingdom come ; thy will 
 be fulfilled as well in Earth as it is in Heven. 
 Geve us this daye in dayly bred ; and forgeve 
 us oure detters. And leade us not into Temp- 
 tation ; but delyver us from evyll. For thyne 
 is the Kyngdom, and the power and the glo- 
 rye for ever. Amen. 
 
 ENGLISH 9. 
 
 O oure Father which artein heven halowed be 
 thy name. Let thy kingdome come. Thy will 
 be fulfilled, as well in erth, as it is in heven. 
 Geve us this daye oure dayly bred. And for- 
 geve us our treaspases, even as we forgeve 
 oure trespacers. And lead us not into tempta- 
 cion, but delyver us from evyll. Amen.
 
 69 
 
 ENGLISH 7. 
 
 About the year 1430, in the reign of Henry VI. as ap- 
 pears by a large MS. vellum Bible in the Oxford Library, 
 which was given by this King to the Carthusians, at Lon- 
 don, the Lord's Prayer was thus rendered. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 8. 
 
 ENGLISH 8. 
 
 We find the first version of the Lord's Prayer, with the 
 doxology, in Tyndale's translation, in the year 1526, in 
 the reign of Henry VIII. 
 
 Martin's Inst. p. 16. 
 
 ENGLISH 9. 
 
 About ten years after, and in the same reign, we meet 
 with another Bible, set forth by the King's license, and 
 translated by Thomas Mathew, in which the Lord's Prayer 
 is thus differently given. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 8.
 
 70 
 
 ENGLISH 10. 
 
 Our father which art in heaven, halowed be 
 thy name, Let thy Kingdom come, Thy will 
 be fulfilled, as well in earth as it is in heaven : 
 Give ous this day our dayly bread : And for- 
 give ous our trespasses, even as we forgive 
 our trespassers : And lead ous not into temp- 
 tation, But delyver ous from evyl. Amen. 
 
 ENGLISH 11. 
 
 O our father which art in heauen halowed be 
 thy name. Let thy kingdome come. Thy wyll 
 be done, as well in earth, as it is in heauen. 
 Give vs this Day our dayly breade. And for- 
 gyue vs our dettes, as we forgyue our detters. 
 And leade vs not into temptation, but deliuer 
 vs from euill : for thine is the kingdome, and 
 the power, and the glorie, for euer. Amen. 
 
 ENGLISH 12. 
 
 Our Father which art in Heaven hallowed bee 
 thy Name. Thy Kingdom come. Thy Will 
 bee done even in Earth as it is in Heaven. 
 Give us this Day our daily Bread and forgive 
 us our Dettes, as wee also forgive our Detters. 
 And leade us not into Temptation but deliver 
 us from evil: for thine is the Kingdom, and 
 the Power and the Glory for ever. Amen.
 
 71 
 
 ENGLISH 10. 
 
 This version is handed to us as a translation by Sir John 
 Cheke, Professor of Greek in the University of Cambridge, 
 in the reign of Edward VI. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 69. 
 
 ENGLISH 11. 
 
 The annexed Lord's Prayer is taken from Archbishop 
 Cranmer's Bible, in the author's possession, which was 
 printed in 1575, in the reign of Queen Elizabeth. 
 
 ENGLISH 12. 
 
 In 1610, in the time of James I. we find it in a Bible, 
 printed at London by Barker, rendered thus. 
 
 Martin's Inst. p. 16.
 
 72 
 
 ENGLISH 13. 
 
 Our Father who art in Heaven, sacredly re- 
 verenced be thy Name; Let thy Kingdom 
 come; may thy Will be done, even on Earth 
 according as in Heaven; Give us our daily 
 bread to day; and forgive us our trespasses, 
 as we also forgive those that trespass against 
 us; and do not bring us into trial, but deli- 
 ver us from wickedness ; since the Kingdom, 
 Power and Glory is thine for ever : so let it be. 
 
 ENGLISH 14. 
 
 Our father which art in heaven, hallowed be 
 thy Name; thy kingdom come; thy will be 
 done in earth as it is in heaven ; give us this 
 day our daily bread ; and forgive us our debts 
 as we forgive our debtors: and lead us not 
 into temptation, but deliver us from evil : for 
 thine is the kingdom and the power and the 
 glory for ever. Amen. 
 
 ENGLISH 15. 
 
 c BD Ce jff 
 f t ) 2l ft it
 
 73 
 ENGLISH 13. 
 
 The annexed reading of the Lord's Prayer is taken from 
 Anthony Purver's new and literal translation of the Old 
 and New Testament, published in 1764, corrected by him- 
 self. Matth. VI. v. 9, #c. 
 
 ENGLISH 14. 
 
 This is the modern reading of the Lord's Prayer, as 
 given in the Bibles and Testaments now published in our 
 Universities, taken from the Gofpel of St. Matthew, chap* 
 VI. v. 9, &c. 
 
 ENGLISH 15. 
 
 This character, which is derived from the Gothic, is cal- 
 led by the French Lettres de forme; by us it is known under 
 the name of Old English, or Black Letter : it was the first 
 used by Guttemberg and Faust at Mentz, and was by them 
 and the printers denominated Lettres Bourgeoises*
 
 74 
 
 ENGLISH 16. 
 
 ENGLISH 17.
 
 75 
 ENGLISH 16. 
 
 Set Chancery. This alphabet began to take place in this 
 country about the decline of the fourteenth century, and 
 is, with the following, or Running Chancery, used in the 
 enrollments of letters patent, charters, &c. and in the ex- 
 emplification of recoveries. 
 
 Astle on Writing, p. 145. 
 
 ENGLISH 17. 
 
 Running Chancery. 
 
 See the above note. 
 

 
 76 
 
 ENGLISH 18. 
 
 E 
 
 ENGLISH 19. 
 
 $ B tf 9 f 
 
 1 s e in ti ^ 
 
 ENGLISH 20. 
 
 a r^ P F 
 t ]&. I m jp n 
 
 ret
 
 77 
 ENGLISH 18. 
 
 Court or Exchequer Text. The Court of Exchequer 
 was erefled by William the Conqueror, it's model being 
 taken from a similar one established in Normandy long be- 
 fore his time. 
 
 These charafters were invented by the English lawyers 
 about 1550, and continued in use 'till the beginning of the 
 late reign, when it was abolished by al of Parliament. 
 
 Astle on Writing, p. 145. 
 ^ 
 
 ENGLISH 19. 
 
 The lower case or small letters corresponding with the. 
 above. 
 
 ENGLISH 20. 
 
 Church Text. As the lawyers had alphabets appropriated 
 to various purposes, it seemed reasonable that Ecclesiastics 
 should not be behind in invention, especially as they were 
 esteemed the curators of all learning for five centuries; 
 they therefore invented this alphabet for the use of the 
 church.
 
 78 
 
 ENGLISH 21. 
 
 dlub 
 
 of a&iciH'mtwt %tatiHQ baft 
 OH or arouf tnt wxtn bau or 
 in t&t yitai or out olotb 
 ouffaHb t>t<otw 
 
 aub tiq&tu &C&M wabt 
 o o 
 
 JFtu 
 owl 
 
 ECCLEMACH. 
 
 A friend 
 The beard 
 The teeth 
 No 
 
 Nigefech 
 Iscotre 
 Aour 
 
 A bow 
 To dance 
 Seal 
 Yes 
 
 Pagounach 
 Mej'pa 
 Opobabos 
 
 Father 
 
 Aoi 
 
 Mother 
 
 Atzia 
 
 Star 
 One 
 
 Aimoulas 
 
 Night 
 Six 
 
 Toumanes 
 Pekoulana 
 
 Two 
 
 Oulach 
 
 Seven 
 
 Houlakoala 
 
 Three 
 Four 
 
 Amnahou 
 
 Eight 
 Nine 
 
 Koulefala 
 Kamakoual 
 
 Five 
 
 Pemaka 
 
 Ten 
 
 Tomoila
 
 
 79 
 ENGLISH 21. 
 
 Secretary; invented in the 16th century, and has been 
 used ever since by English lawyers, in engrossing their 
 conveyances and legal instruments. 
 
 Astle on Writing, p. 146. 
 
 ECCLEMACH. 
 
 This is the language of a colony of North California, 
 which differs widely from those of all their neighbours, and 
 possesses more resemblance to our European tongues, than 
 to those of North America. 
 
 The specimen given is extracted from the vocabulary. 
 Perouse, Vol. 2. p. 245.
 
 80 
 
 ESQUIMAUX. 
 
 The hair 
 Eye-brow 
 The ear 
 The neck 
 
 New-rock The eye 
 Coop-loot The nose 
 Se-u-teck The chin 
 Coon-e-soke The arm 
 
 Ehich 
 Cring-yauk 
 Taplow 
 Telluk 
 
 The hand 
 The foot 
 
 Alguit 
 E-te-ket 
 
 The leg 
 The sun 
 
 Ki-naw-auk 
 Suek-ki-nuc 
 
 The moon 
 
 Tac-cock 
 
 Fire 
 
 Ekoma 
 
 A house 
 A paddle 
 The breast 
 One 
 Two 
 
 Tope~uck A canoe 
 Pow Iron 
 Suck-ke-uc Arrows 
 Attouset Six 
 Mardluk Seven 
 
 Kirock 
 Shaveck 
 Caucjuck 
 Arbanget 
 Attausek 
 
 Three 
 Four 
 
 Pingasut 
 Sissamat 
 
 Eight 
 Nine 
 
 Mardlik 
 Kollin illoe 
 
 Five 
 
 Tellimat 
 
 Ten 
 
 Kollit 
 
 ESTHONIC. 
 
 Issa meddi ke sinna ollet Taiwas, pohitzetut 
 sakut sunno nimmi. Tulckut meile sunno ric- 
 kus. Sunno tachtminne sundkut, kui Taiwas, 
 ninda kahs mah pehl. Meddi iggapeiwase lei- 
 ba anna meile tennapeiw. Nink anna meile 
 andix meddi wolgkat, kudt meie andix anna- 
 me meddi wolgkaleisille. Nink erra satameid 
 kinsatusse sisze. Erranis erhapehsta meid kei- 
 ckest kurjast. Sest sunno on se rickus, nink 
 se weggi, nink se auw, iggawest. Amen.
 
 81 
 
 ESQUIMAUX. 
 
 The Esquimaux inhabit that vast traft of country called 
 Labrador, or New Britain, in North America. The spe- 
 cimen given is taken from the vocabulary of the language. 
 Cook's Last Voy. v. 3. p. 554. 
 
 ESTHONIC. 
 
 Esthonia is a Russian government, on the east of the 
 Baltic. The specimen given is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 43.
 
 ETHIOPIC 1. 
 AfM: 
 
 : HAA: dAt*: Uftf: 
 
 AH: AM: A5 
 
 ETHIOPIC 2. 
 
 Abuna xabashamajath. Yithkadash shimacha 
 Thymtsa mangystcha. Yichun phachadacha. 
 Bachama bashamai wabamdyrni. Shishajana 
 zalala ylathana habana yom. Hydyglana aba 
 shana. Chama nyhhnani nyhadyg laxa abasha 
 lana. Waithabyana wysh tha manshuthi, ala 
 adychnana balhhanana ymkulu ychui. 
 
 ETRUSCAN 1. 
 
 ft 3 1 d 3 ^ 3 B 
 
 abgdefze 
 
 O / > v7 rt \A S 1 
 
 th i k I m n 6 p 
 
 q z t 2 * 
 
 r s t ph ps
 
 83 
 ETHIOPIC 1. 
 
 Called also AMHARIC, from Amhara, the chief city of 
 Abyssinia. The dialefts of this language vary in the dif- 
 ferent provinces subjeft to Ethiopia; but the same charac- 
 ter or letter, which Bruce calls the GEEZ, is used to ex- 
 press the several tongues of AMHARA, GEEZ, FALASHA, 
 GALLA, DAMOT AGOW, TCHERATZ AGOW, and GA- 
 FAT; and that it was invented by a Cushite shepherd. 
 
 Bruce, vol. 1. p 401. 
 
 The specimen given is the Lord's Prayer in the Ethiopic 
 
 character. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 14. 
 
 ETHIOPIC 2. 
 
 This is a literal reading of the above. 
 
 Wilk.Ess. p.435. 
 
 ETRUSCAN 1. 
 
 The Etruscans, or Etrurians, as Latin history informs 
 us, were the most ancient people of Italy. Some authors 
 assert, that, soon after the universal deluge, Noah esta- 
 blished there twelve cities, or tribes, who used the same 
 letters or characters, which were entrusted to the priests 
 alone, who varied them according. to their pleasure, as to 
 .their order, and value or import ; writing them sometimes 
 from left to right, or the reverse. There is no doubt but 
 the Etruscan and Pelasgic alphabets, (which see,) are to 
 be traced to the same origin. See Astle on these alphabets. 
 
 The specimen given is copied from the Encyc. Franc. 
 
 pi. VIII. 
 
 Duret, p- 757.
 
 84 
 
 ETRUSCAN 2. 
 
 UM3 I X / 8 
 
 bcde fgh 
 
 k 1 m n o p 
 
 .X.Y;* T A H 
 
 r s t u x y 
 ETRUSCAN 3. 
 
 f V % 3 K, Z d 
 
 h gfedcba 
 
 AH-^tLMtf J V 
 
 qponml ki 
 
 y ^ z ^r v TT z 
 
 il ch z x v t s 
 
 k 
 
 FINLAND. 
 
 Isa meiden joca olet taivvaisa, pyhittetty stol- 
 con sinum nymes ; la he stolcon sinum vval- 
 dacunda, olcon sinum tahtos nyen maasa cuj- 
 non taivvas, anna meille tana paivvan ; mei- 
 den jo capaivvainen leipam : la anna meidan 
 vvelcamme andexi, ninquin me andexi anna- 
 me meiden vvelgolisten, ja ala johdata mei ta 
 ]dn sauxen ; mutta paasta meita paastha, silla
 
 85 
 ETRU SCAN 2. 
 
 This character, which is written from left to right, The- 
 seus Ambrosius says, is to be found in many libraries in 
 Italy. 
 
 Duret, p. 757. ' 
 
 Le Clabart, p. 624. 
 
 ETRUSCAN 3. 
 
 On the above authority we have also this character, 
 which is written from right to left. 
 
 Duret, p. 758. 
 Le Clabart, p. 623. 
 
 FINLAND. 
 
 The Sclavon tongue was formerly used in this country, 
 but since it came under the dominion of the kings of Swe- 
 den, they have spoken two languages ; the Sclavon in one 
 part, and the Swedish in another ; but in the interior of 
 the country, they have a proper one, of which the an- 
 nexed is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Duret, p. 868. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 44.
 
 86 
 
 FLEMISH. 
 
 FORMOSA N. 
 
 Diameta ka tu vullum lulugniang ta nanang 
 oho, maba tongal ta tao tu goumoho, mam- 
 talto ki kamoienhu tu nai mama tu vullum : 
 pecame ka cangniang wagi katta. Hamieca- 
 me ki varaviang mamemiang mamia ta varau 
 ki tao ka mouro ki riich emitang. Inecame 
 poudangadangach souaia mecame ki litto, ka 
 imhouato ta gumaguma kallipuchang kasasa- 
 magang, mikaqua. Amen. 
 
 FRANCO-GALLIC. 
 
 g 
 
 i Imnopqr 
 
 s t; ti OK y % 
 
 s t u x y z 
 
 abcdef
 
 87 
 FLEMISH. 
 
 This is the proper character of the Austrian and French 
 Netherlands, and is used in their common printing. 
 
 FORMOSAN. 
 
 This is the Lord's Prayer, in the native language of this 
 island. 
 
 Oral. Dom. p. 62. 
 
 FRANCO-GALLIC. 
 
 This character was used under the first race of die kings 
 of France, in their public afts. It was so named, because 
 the French mixed their letters with those of the Gauls, 
 whom they had conquered. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 270.
 
 88 
 
 FRANKS 1. 
 
 3 8 T4<D 
 
 abcdefgh 
 
 *f V VTH Z O E P 
 
 i k 1m no P r 
 
 C 5 STA # HA 8 
 
 s t x y ph ch ps o 
 
 FRANKS 2. 
 
 a b cd ef-g h 
 
 I K I cr. kl o P CX 
 
 ik Imnopq 
 
 1* J T V JT Y 
 
 r s t u x y 
 
 FRENCH 1. 
 
 abcdef gh 
 
 1 1C L M N O P Q 
 
 i kl mnopq 
 
 R. ^ T V TS Y 
 
 r s t u x y
 
 89 
 FRANKS 1. 
 
 The Franks, who survived the destruction of Troy about 
 1140, B. C. came and settled in the low countries of Ger- 
 many, under Marcomin their leader, where the Saxons 
 afforded them an asylum near the mouths of the Rhine ; 
 whence, after some time, they made frequent and vigorous 
 attacks upon their neighbours, and were in continual wars 
 against the Romans and Gauls upwards of 900 years ; and 
 extended their empire over great part of Europe, according 
 to Hunibauld, who informs us, that Vuastbal wrote in this 
 character an account of their conquests, and every thing 
 remarkable during 758 years. This alphabet is also given 
 on the authority of the Abbe Triteme. 
 
 Duret, p. 865. 
 
 FRANKS 2. 
 
 The language of this people, called Lingua Franca, is 
 a kind of jargon spoken on the Mediterranean, particu- 
 larly the coasts of the Levant, composed of Italian, Spa- 
 nish, French, vulgar Greek, and other tongues. 
 
 Massey, p. 103. 
 
 FRENCH 1. 
 
 This alphabet was used in France in the fifth century, 
 under the first race of their kings. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 268.
 
 90 
 
 FRENCH 2. 
 
 Nostre pere qui es es cieulx, ton nom soitsan- 
 tifie; ton royaume advenie; ta volonte soit 
 fafte, ainsi en la terre comme au cieulx ; nos- 
 tre pain quotidiain donne nous aviourdhuy; 
 et pardonne nous noz faultes, comme nous 
 pardonnons a ceulx qui nous ont offenzes ; et 
 ne nous induy point en tentation, mais deli- 
 ure nous de mal. Amen. 
 
 FRENCH 3. 
 
 Notre Pere qui es aux cieux, ton nom soit 
 sanclifie. Ton regne vienne. Ta volonte soit 
 faite en la terre comme au ciel. Donne-nous 
 aujourd'hui notre pain quotidien. Pardonne- 
 nous nos offenses, comme nous pardonnons 
 a ceux qui nous ont offenses. Et ne nous in- 
 duis point en la tentation, mais nous delivre 
 de mal. Amen. 
 
 FRISIC. 
 
 Ws Haita duu derstu biste yne hymil, dyn 
 name wird heiligt, dyn ryck tokomme, dyn 
 wille moet schoen, opt yrtryck as yne hy- 
 mil. Ws deilix brae jov ws juved; in verjou 
 ws,, vvs schylden, as wy vejac ws schyldnirs ; 
 In lied ws na6l in versieking: Din fry ws 
 vin it quaed : Dan dyn is it ryck, de macht,
 
 91 
 FRENCH 2. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 FRENCH 3. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer in the language as spoken at this day. 
 
 Guthrie, p. 849. 
 
 FRISIC. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435.
 
 92 
 
 FRIENDLY ISLES. 
 
 Ve faine 
 Koeea 
 Fooee vy 
 Etooa 
 Etarre 
 Efangoo 
 Tangooroo 
 Etolle 
 Enoo 
 Eao 
 Fooo 
 Matangee 
 Elango 
 Kaee 
 Veenaga 
 Eeegee 
 Elangee 
 Ao ' 
 
 A woman 
 Yes 
 The leg 
 The back 
 To cough 
 To sneeze 
 To snore 
 A hatchet 
 A belt 
 A hat 
 A nail 
 Wind 
 Afly 
 No 
 Charming 
 A chief 
 The sky 
 Clouds 
 
 Maiee 
 Fooroo 
 Eboore 
 Elelo 
 Hengatoo 
 Moe 
 Ekatta 
 Aiee 
 Etovee 
 Poooree 
 Epallo 
 Tamadje 
 Efonno 
 Moeha 
 Totto 
 Eatooa 
 Elaa 
 Laa 
 
 Breadfruit 
 The hair 
 The breast 
 The tongue 
 Cloth 
 Sleep 
 To laugh 
 A fan 
 A club 
 Night 
 A rat 
 A child 
 A turtle 
 More 
 Blood 
 God 
 The sun 
 A sail 
 
 FRIULIAN. 
 
 Pari nestri ch'ees in cijl, see sandificaat la to 
 nom ; vigna lu to ream, see fatta la too vo- 
 luntaat, sice' in cijl, et in tierra : Da nus hu'- 
 el nestri pan cotidian; et perdonni nus glu 
 nestris debiz, sicu noo perduin agl nestris de- 
 betoors. E no nus menaa in tentation; ma 
 libora nus dal mal. Amen.
 
 93 
 
 FRIENDLY ISLES. 
 
 These are a cluster of islands in the South Pacific Ocean, 
 and were so named by Capt. James Cook in 1773; they 
 are situated between 20 and 23 degrees of south latitude, 
 and between 170 and 180 degrees of west longitude. 
 
 This specimen of the language is taken from the voca- 
 bulary. 
 
 Cook's Voy. Vol. 3. p. .531. 
 
 FRIULIAN. 
 
 Or Forojulian; this specimen of the language is the 
 Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435.
 
 94 
 
 GAMBIA. 
 
 Killing One Sae Eight 
 
 Foola Two Conunte Nine 
 
 Saba Three Tang Ten 
 
 Nane Four Tangkillin Eleven 
 
 Looloo Five Emva Twenty 
 
 GEORGIAN 1. 
 
 & B r A E &> Z H 
 
 abgd etzzh 
 
 J K 9v MN O 
 
 th i k 1 m n x o 
 
 p r s t u ph ch ps 
 GEORGIAN 2. 
 
 7 
 
 a b gh d e v sz h th i 
 
 L 
 
 ch Imni opsgr s 
 
 t v f k ghh cq sc c zz z 
 
 F &C Yfi, a 
 
 zz cc chh hh g hha hho
 
 95 
 GAMBIA. 
 
 Taken from the vocabulary of numeration of the negroes 
 on the river Gambia in Africa ; but no mention is made 
 
 of their peculiar language. 
 
 Park. Voy. p. 206. 
 
 GEORGIAN 1. 
 
 This alphabet is formed from the Greek, according to 
 Postellus, who says, that the Georgians use that language 
 in their prayers, but on other occasions they employ the 
 Tartarian and Armenian letters. This specimen is almost 
 Greek, both by name and figure, and was taken from an 
 ancient book of voyages to the Holy Land, by a Monk 
 named Nicolle Hues, A. D. 1487. 
 
 Duret, p. 749. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 221 . 
 
 GEORGIAN 2. 
 
 This, and the two succeeding alphabets, according to 
 the Encyc. Franc, are in use among the Georgians, and 
 are written from left to right; but Fournier says, that the 
 name is taken from the Martyr St. George, whom the 
 Iberians have chosen for their patron, and regard as their 
 Apostle. 
 
 The alphabets, of which these are only the capital letters, 
 are called sacred, from their having been used in transcrib- 
 ing their Holy Books. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 276. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XIV.
 
 GEORGIAN 3. 
 
 96 
 
 a b gh d e v sz h th i 
 
 k m Z ft $ tm Ug? ill A 
 
 ch 1 m n i o p sg r s 
 
 ?/ Hi/ ??Z4, tfz t/ 0" ft dt 
 
 t v f k ghh cq sc c zz z 
 
 TK 3- p y jf wit ^ 
 
 zz cc chh hh g hha hho 
 
 GEORGIAN 4. 
 
 a b gh d e v sz h th i 
 
 3 > 9 6 o o> i i< (> 
 
 chlmniopsgr s 
 
 t v f k ghh cq sc c zz z 
 
 ^ 6= b 3 * 1 * 
 
 zz cc chh hh g hha hha
 
 97 
 GEORGIAN 3. 
 
 This alphabet is only the small or lower case letters to 
 the former. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 276. 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XIV. 
 
 GEORGIAN 4. 
 
 This is the cursive, or common running hand of the 
 Georgians, and is in use at the present time. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XIV. 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 276.
 
 98 
 
 GEORGIAN 5. 
 
 Mamao cjueno romeli chbar zzahta sciua. 
 Tzmida ikachn sa-chheli sceni. Sceni move- 
 din suphocha sceni. Ikachn neba sceni os za- 
 tha scina eghre kue-chanisa szeda. Puri cju- 
 eni arsobisa momez cjuens dges da. Momith- 
 even cjuenthana nadebni cjueni os cjuen mi- 
 utevebth thana mjebtha math cjuentha. Ala 
 michsneb cjuen borothifagan. Amin. 
 
 GERMAN 1. 
 
 GERMAN 2 
 
 oBc ^>e 
 ij I T tw n D 51 q 
 i n f>
 
 99 
 GEORGIAN 5, 
 
 The literal reading of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 31. 
 
 GERMAN 1. 
 
 A specimen of this language is already given under the 
 article HIGH DUTCH, (which see). This alphabet shews 
 the capital letters in use for their general printing. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 267. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. X. 
 
 GERMAN 2. 
 
 These are the lower case or small letters to the above. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 267. 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. X,
 
 100 
 
 GOTHIC 1. 
 
 bcdefgh 
 
 i klmnop q 
 
 R. SL 4- A 0*L,L 
 
 r s t v x y z 
 GOTHIC 2. 
 
 \B-rAF<7Tl 
 
 a bgdefgh 
 
 y> t K A M N x n 
 
 thiklmno p 
 
 ^J^Trxo^Yz 
 
 qrs t uwx yz 
 GOTHIC 3. 
 
 a b c b ( f g 
 tklmnoj) q
 
 101 
 
 . GOTHIC. 
 
 In the history of the North, we are informed that Ul- 
 philas, or Gulphila, bishop of the Goths, who lived in 
 Maesia about A. D. 370, was the first who invented the 
 letters or characters of his nation ; and that he translated 
 the holy scriptures out of the Greek into his proper lan- 
 guage. Jean le Grand gives him full credit for the latter, 
 but insists that the letters were in use before the bishop's 
 time. Other historians assert, that the Goths always had 
 the use of letters, and what confirms this sentiment is, that 
 Le Grand, in his history of Gothic characters, says, that 
 before, or very soon after the flood, there were found, 
 engraved in letters on large stones, the memorable afts of 
 great men. 
 
 Olaus Magnus, brother to Le Grand, assures us, that 
 the Goths wrote upon wood, and upon the bark of trees, 
 worked into sheets, and sometimes on skins ; and that they 
 used ink made of coal finely ground, with milk or water. 
 
 It is asserted by different authors, that they wrote the 
 Celtic and Teutonic. 
 
 Duret, p. 862. 
 Olaus Mag. p. 14. 
 
 GOTHIC 1. 
 
 This is given as the earliest Gothic, and seems to have 
 great affinity to the Runic, 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 271. 
 
 Duret, p. 862. 
 
 Le Clabart, p. 379. 
 
 GOTHIC 2. 
 
 This character, which is formed of the Greek and Latin, 
 is attributed to Ulphilas, bishop of the Goths above men- 
 tioned, who is said to have invented them about A. D 388. 
 
 Spanh. Dissert, p. 114. 
 ' Dr. Morton's Tables. 
 Massey, p. 103. 
 
 GOTHIC 3. 
 
 This alphabet, which is much like the German, has been 
 a long time in use in France : It is attributed to Albert 
 Durer, who flourished early in the sixteenth century. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. IX.
 
 102 
 
 GOTHIC 4. 
 
 Atta unsar thu in himinam; veihnai namo 
 thein; Quimai thiudinassus theins, vairthai 
 vilja theins, sve in himina, jah ana airthai. 
 Hlaif unsarana thana sinteinan gif uns him- 
 madaga. Jah aflet uns thatei sculans sijaima 
 sua sue jah veis afletam thaim skulam unsa- 
 raim; jah ni briggais uns in fraistubnjai. Ak 
 lausei uns af thamma ubilin. Amen. 
 
 GOTHIC. 
 
 A B r e^e 1= 9 h 
 
 a b g d e f gj h 
 
 i k 1 m n o p hp 
 
 tC S T a V X X 
 
 r s t th q w ch z 
 
 
 
 GRANDAN. 
 
 a I ou rou lou e o am 
 
 J 2u _ju ^ /Zc9" ^ O 
 
 kha gha tcha ja jha igna ta tha 
 
 2O ^TSj ^J oj /TJ 2- 
 
 da na pa ba ya ra la va
 
 103 
 GOTHIC 4. 
 
 This is the literal reading of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 21. 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 MJESO GOTHIC. 
 
 This letter is also attributed to Ulphilas, and was used 
 m the translation of the holy scriptures. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. IX. 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 271. 
 
 GRANDAN. 
 
 An Indian alphabet, said to be in use at Pondicherry, 
 but it seems to be incomplete. 
 
 Encyc. Franc. pL XVI.
 
 104 
 
 GREENLAND. 
 
 Angut A man Iglo A house 
 
 Kaiak A canoe Pautik A paddle 
 
 Aglikak Darts Nag No 
 
 Illisve Yes Attousek One 
 
 Arlak Two Pingajuah Three 
 
 Sissamat Four Tellimat Five 
 
 GRISONS, 
 
 Bab nos quel tii ist in eschil, santifichio saia 
 ilgtes num ; ilgtes ariginam uigna ter nus, la 
 thia uoeglia d'uainta, in terra sco la fo in esc- 
 hil ; do a nus nos paun houtz & in miinchia 
 di; parduna a nus nos dbits, sco nus fain a. 
 nos dbitaduors ; nun ens mener in mel apro- 
 uaimaint ; dimpersemaing spendra nus da tu- 
 ots mels. Amen. 
 
 GUELDERLAND. 
 
 Onse Vayer, die ghey seit in den hemel ; ge- 
 heylicht sey uwen naem ; wu reyck ons toe- 
 coem, uwen will geschieh up erden, als in de 
 hemel ; geeft ons heuyen ons daghelichs broot: 
 ende vergeeft ons onse sculdt, als wey verge- 
 ven onse sculdengers ; ende enleyt ons met 
 in becooringhe; sondern verloest ons van al- 
 ien quaden. Amen*
 
 105 
 GREENLAND. 
 
 Taken from the table, shewing the affinity between the 
 languages spoken at OONALASHKA and NORTON SOUND, 
 and those of the GREENLANDERS and ESQUIMAUX. 
 
 Cook's Voy. Vol. 3. p. 554. 
 
 GRISONS. 
 
 A small republic of Italy, inhabiting the Alps. 
 This specimen of their language is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 GUELDERLAND. 
 This is also the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 56.
 
 106 
 
 GREEK. 
 
 The alphabets given under this title were those ori- 
 ginally in use over all Europe. Even those countries 
 which did not speak the Greek language, employed the 
 characters of it. Czesar found them in use among the 
 ancient Gauls, and there can be no doubt but the Roman 
 language and characters were derived from the same sources 
 as the Greek. 
 
 Before the victories of Alexander, this language Was 
 principally confined to Turkey in Europe, Sicily, Dal- 
 matia, Anatolia, and the islands of the Archipelago ; his 
 generals and successors extended it over many parts of 
 Asia and Egypt; so that from the time of Alexander, to 
 that of Pompey, it may be considered as having been the 
 most general language of the world; and what is truly 
 astonishing, it continues to be spoken in a manner, which 
 would have been intelligible to the ancient inhabitants of 
 Greece. 
 
 This is, perhaps, an instance of the greatest longevity 
 of language ; few others having continued living and in- 
 telligible more than <500, whereas the Greek has survived 
 3500 years. 
 
 The causes of this will be found in the structure of 
 the language itself, the extent of it's use, and the great 
 merit of the authors who have written in it ; as historians, 
 orators, poets, philosophers, mathematicians, and theolo- 
 gians : the New Testament, as well as the early fathers, 
 are also written in Greek. 
 
 In this, the terms of art are very significant, which is 
 the reason that modern languages borrow so many tech- 
 nical terms from it. When any new invention, instru- 
 ment, machine, &c. is discovered, recourse is generally 
 had to the Greek for a name,' the facility with which words 
 are compounded, affording such as are expressive of it's 
 use; viz. Pantographia, music, barometer, eidouranion, 
 philosophy, &c. &c.
 
 107 
 GREEK. 
 
 Besides the copiousness and significancy of this lan- 
 guage, wherein it excels most, if not all, others, it has 
 three numbers, viz. a singular, dual, and plural ; also abun- 
 dance of tenses in it's verbs, making a variety in discourse, 
 and prevents that dryness always accompanying too great 
 an uniformity, and renders it peculiarly proper for all kinds 
 of poetry. 
 
 It is not an easy matter to assign the precise interval 
 between the modern and ancient Greek, which is to be 
 distinguished by the terminations of the nouns, pronouns, 
 verbs, &c. not unlike what obtains between some of the 
 dialefts of the Italian and Spanish. 
 
 There are also, in the modern Greek, many new words, 
 not to be met with in the ancient: we may therefore dis- 
 tinguish three ages of this tongue, the first of which ends 
 at the time when Constantinople became the capital of the 
 Roman empire, about A. D. 360; from which period the 
 second continued 'till the taking of that city by the Turks, 
 in 1453; and the third from that to the present time. 
 
 When we compare the ancient Greek with the Phenician 
 and Samaritan alphabets, no doubt can remain of their ori- 
 gin ; and it is probable, that the use of letters travelled, pro- 
 gressively, from Chaldea to Phenicia, and thence along the 
 coast of the Mediterranean, to Crete and Ionia, whence it 
 might readily have passed over into Greece. 
 
 As Inachus and Cecrops were said to have been Egyp- 
 tians, as was Agenor, the father of Cadmus, some have 
 supposed that the Greeks received their alphabet from 
 Egypt : if this be true, we must confess that the Egyp- 
 tians at that time used the same letters with the Phenicians. 
 
 The opinion most generally received is, that Cadmus, 
 the Phenician, introduced the first Greek alphabet into 
 Bceotia, where he settled B. C. 1500; and this sentiment 
 is supported on the authorities of Herodotus, Diogenes 
 Laertius, Pliny, Plutarch, and others among the ancients,
 
 108 
 
 GREEK. 
 
 and on those of Scaliger, Salmasius, Vossius, Bochart, and 
 other moderns. 
 
 Many believe however, and not without weighty argu- 
 ments on their side, that the Greeks had an alphabet before 
 the time of Cadmus*. Josephus, on the other hand, in his 
 answer to Apion, about the antiquities of the Jews, says, 
 that the Greeks having failed in producing any authentic me- 
 morial of the antiquity of their alphabet, it became after- 
 wards a question, whether the use of their letters was so 
 much as known at the time of the Trojan war, which was 
 decided in the negative. 
 
 The original alphabets, as will be shewn, contained only 
 the letters essentially necessary ; other single consonants, 
 the double ones, and the long vowels, being the result of 
 subsequent improvement. 
 
 The opinion of Montfaucon appears highly probable, 
 that the original alphabet of Cadmus consisted only of the 
 sixteen following letters : 
 
 ABTAEIKAMNOIIPZTT 
 together with the extra characters used for numerals, viz. 
 ^ or F for 6, and in the ^,olic dialeft for V or W, and fol- 
 lows E ; ^ after II for 900 ; and Cj or CJ for 90, before P ; 
 which three chara61ers are evidently from the Phenician al- 
 phabet, where they hold the same places. 
 
 The honor of adding the other eight is differently assigned 
 by different authors. Montfaucon contents himself with 
 saying, that it seems as probable an opinion as any, that 
 Palamedes, during the Trojan war, added 
 
 E * X 
 and Simonides, long afterwards, the remaining four, viz. 
 
 z H#a 
 
 But Westenius, de lingua Grceca, tells us, that Pythago- 
 ras invented the T of the original alphabet, as a represen- 
 tation of the path of life. 
 
 * See Astle on the origin of writing.
 
 109 
 
 GREEK. 
 
 Epicharmus, the Sicilian, is also said to have invented 
 the and X, which others give to Palamedes. 
 
 I agree with Chishull in considering the H aspirate, as 
 an original radical letter, not only because it is found in 
 all the ancient alphabets, but because there is no other ra- 
 dical from which it could have been derived. 
 
 Diodorus Siculus, a writer of great authority, contends 
 that the Pelasgic letters were prior to the Cadmean ; hence 
 it is inferred, that the Pelasgic Argive, and the Attic, were 
 of the same origin, and the Cadmean the same with the 
 ^Eolian and Ionian, which is confirmed by the application 
 of the letters to numbers. This inference, however, ap- 
 pears to be opposed by the general confession, that the 
 Latin, (which we would naturally conclude to have been 
 derived from the Etruscan) is undoubtedly the offspring of 
 the Doric dialeft of the Greek. The discussion, however, 
 of this question cannot be expected in a work of this kind. 
 
 The alphabets of all languages, as well as the laws of 
 all nations, ought to be in a state of progressive improve- 
 ment. * It is probable, that the first alphabets were very 
 defective in the number of their characters, and that ad- 
 . ditions were successively made, when the same letter was 
 observed to represent different sounds. 
 
 Greece and Etruria appear to have been the first parts of 
 Europe in which alphabets were used. 
 
 The first European alphabet is proved to have been the 
 Pelasgic, or Etruscan, of which the original or radical let- 
 ters are given in No. 1. and 2. 
 
 Astle on the radical letters of the Pelasgians, p. 5. in- 
 forms us, that " the alphabet, which the Pelasgi first brought 
 " into Italy, and which has been called their original al- 
 " phabet, was probably carried out of Phenicia before the 
 " Phenicians themselves had augmented the number of ra- 
 " dical letters, of which it was originally composed. This 
 
 * See Astle on the radical letters of the Pelasgi and Etruscans.
 
 110 
 
 GREEK 1. 
 
 A0VV843A 
 
 i h f f f f . e a 
 
 -T e q i M M -4 3 
 
 tsrpnml k 
 
 GREEK 2. 
 
 M <J 4 X ) I 3 ft 
 
 m 1 k k k i e a 
 
 vvvtsrp n 
 
 GREEK 3.. 
 
 befgzhth 
 
 ]4 2 1 8 
 
 klmnspph 
 
 ch r ps t
 
 Ill 
 
 GREEK. 
 
 " alphabet consisted of thirteen letters, according to Dr. 
 " Swinton ; but according to Father Gori, who .appears 
 " to have been better informed, the original alphabet con- 
 " sisted only of twelve letters. As these authors differ 
 " materially, it may be proper to give both alphabets." 
 
 GREEK 1. 
 
 The most ancient inscriptions in the Pelasgian characters 
 and language, are those found at Eugubium, a city in 
 Umbria, in the Apennines, A. D. 1456. 
 
 Astle on Writing, p. 64. 
 
 This is Dr. Swinton's radical Pelasgian alphabet, and has 
 thirteen characters or sounds. 
 
 Astle on the Pelasgian character, p. 5. 
 
 GREEK 2. 
 
 The radical Pelasgian alphabet of Father Gori, contain- 
 ing twelve characters or sounds, which Astle supposes to be 
 
 the most correft. 
 
 Astle on the Pelasgian character, p. 5. 
 
 Astle in the same work, p. 13. thinks the additional 
 letters were derived from the radicals in the following man- 
 ner, viz. 
 
 K diminished, produced the Roman C and Greek F. 
 II augmented or condensed, became B and aspirated O. 
 2 becomes Z in most languages. 
 T naturally produces A and . 
 F or T produced O and fi, and perhaps &. 
 H is K 2, and * is II 2. 
 The X was doubtless the guttural sound of Gh or Ch. 
 
 GREEK 3. 
 
 This Pelasgian alphabet is also taken from the Eugubian 
 tables, and contains twenty letters. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. VIII.
 
 112 
 
 GREEK 4. 
 
 AB r A E F Z H 
 
 abgdefzh 
 
 Of t KAMNE 
 
 thi ik Imnx 
 
 o T js> <r 9 p i T 
 
 opssqq r s t 
 
 GREEK 5. 
 
 & AAV^M H // 
 
 b g d e eh 
 
 m 
 
 I I K>l Usl 
 
 th i k 1 
 
 on PP q <i /> 83 ; 
 
 6 p r s 
 
 ZT7-VH9-H OJl 
 
 t u ph ch 6
 
 113 
 
 GREEK 4. 
 
 The alphabet of Cadmus, or the Ionic, B. C. 1500; 
 formed from the Phenician reversed ; taken from the coins 
 
 of Sicily, Bceotia, Attica, &c. 
 
 Dr. Barnard's Tables. 
 
 Spanheim, p. 82. 
 
 GREEK 5. 
 
 THIS alphabet (the deficient letters being supplied on 
 the authority of Chishull) is taken from the Sigean in- 
 scription*, so called from the promontory and town of 
 Sigeum, near Troy, where it was found. It is engraved 
 on a pillar of beautifully white marble, nine feet high, 
 two feet broad, and eight inches thick; which, as appears 
 by an excavation in the top, and the tenor of the inscription, 
 supported a bust or statue of Phanodicus, whose name it 
 bears ; and was undoubtedly erefted before the time of Si- 
 monides, who flourished 500 years before Christ. 
 
 The antiquity of it is evinced by it's being read alter- 
 nately from left to right, and from right to left ; as well as 
 by the state of the Greek alphabet at that time : for we ob- 
 serve, that Simonides had not then introduced the use of 
 the H for the long E, nor the fi for the long O. Some 
 time after the pillar had been creeled, and most probably 
 after the town of Sigeum had come under the power of 
 the Athenians, which happened about 590 years B. C., the 
 first part of the inscription was again engraven near the top 
 of the pillar, with the H and fi ; which, in the original, 
 are supplied by E and O, and where the H is used only as 
 an aspirate, as in modern languages. 
 
 Chishull, p. 4. 
 
 * Qiia nulla in toto Orbe speftabilior, neque genuinae unquam 
 antiquitatis certioribus indiciis claruit. CHISHULL, p. 3.
 
 114 
 
 GREEK 6. 
 
 E V
 
 115 
 GREEK 6. 
 
 Is the original inscription; the reading of which, in 
 the common small Greek letter, is here given, observ- 
 ing that every second line of the original is read from right 
 to left ; which manner of writing was called /3ff?go<p7)$ov, as 
 imitating the turn of the oxen at the- end of each furrow. 
 This union of the European and Eaftern manner of writing 
 in the same piece, was very rarely used after the time of 
 Solon, who probably adopted it, to give his laws an air of 
 antiquity. We cannot imitate this manner of writing, 
 without types cast on purpose, which appears to be un- 
 necessary, as the original is given. 
 
 In the common Greek character it runs thus : 
 
 QoMollKO l(JU TO Hs^O^OLTOg TO 
 
 xoi-yo x%oflOL mrnvToflov mi Us flf-cov eq 
 IM(J(.& 2/ysuftiov. Eav $s TI 
 o vfysieg mi (JLenoeiffsv Houwxog 
 
 Chishull, p. 4. 
 
 GREEK 7. 
 
 Is that part of the inscription which was copied after 
 Simonides had completed the Greek alphabet, and is as 
 follows, reading every second line from right to left ; 
 
 (JLl TO(JLOXOLTOq TO 
 
 XOU VTFQXWTVIlW KO/Ll 
 
 This secondary inscription varies from the original in 
 one whole word only, viz. ytfoxg^rj^ov for E7n<T7o!?ov, which 
 does not alter the sense ; and the omission of the words 
 xayw and wny*a. ; but we observe the regular use of the 
 long vowels, and the omission of the aspirate H.
 
 116 
 
 GREEK 8. 
 
 GREEK 9. 
 
 A B r A E FZH 
 
 abgdefze 
 
 6 I K A At N = O 
 
 thi k . 1 m nx 6 
 
 FM P 1TY0JX 
 
 pqr stupho 
 
 GREEK 10. 
 
 A 
 
 I 
 
 th i 
 
 d e 
 
 M N N o r 
 
 1 m n o p 
 
 fi 4 * T Y S 
 
 r s t u chi 
 
 K 
 
 k
 
 117 
 
 GREEK. 
 
 The S in the original has the two most ancient forms of 
 that letter ; in the other, that of the Scythian bow. 
 
 We also remark a few errors of the workmen, who cut 
 each of the inscriptions ; but the orthography of the last 
 word in No. VII. is either very erroneous, or confirms 
 the opinion that the Greek K had sometimes the force of 
 the T or the Latin C. 
 
 Chishull, p. 4. 
 
 GREEK 8. 
 
 Contains the real form and magnitude of the letters 
 upon the Sigean marble, viz. the EFI2 or SIGE read 
 from right to left in the sixth line of No. 6. 
 
 Chishull, p. 4. 
 
 GREEK 9. 
 
 This is the completed Greek alphabet of Simonides, as 
 used on coins and inscriptions in Attica, about B. C. <500. 
 the three last letters are unintentionally omitted. 
 
 Dr. Barnard's Tables. 
 Spanh. Dissert, p. 82. 
 
 GREEK 10. 
 
 The Nemean. This alphabet is taken from ancient mar- 
 bles, on which it is said to have been engraved before the 
 Peloponnesian war, which happened about B. C. 430. 
 
 Massey, p. 79.
 
 118 
 
 GREEK 11. 
 
 
 
 a d e th i k 1 m 
 
 N S T K 0- 
 
 n or s t u ph 
 GREEK 12. 
 
 A A A 4 E I I 
 
 a g d e e th i 
 
 K V M NOTTPfc 
 
 k 1 m n 6 p r 
 
 STY <P X V O I 
 
 s t u ph ch ps 6 
 
 GREEK 13. 
 
 abgdezeth 
 
 i k 1 m n x 6 p 
 
 R, ^P ^ A r jc 
 
 r s t u ph ch ps o
 
 119 
 GREEK 11. 
 
 The Delian. On mount Cynthus, in the isle of Delos, 
 in the Archipelago, are the remains of a stately building ; 
 and from inscriptions, (from which this character is taken,) 
 discovered some time since, which mention a vow made 
 to Iris, Serapis, and Anubis, it is conjeftured that there 
 stood a temple dedicated to those Egyptian deities, B. C 
 circa 430. 
 
 Encyc. Britan. v. 5. p. 722. 
 Massey, p. 79. 
 
 This alphabet and the preceding furnish us with the 
 origin of the Roman S. ^.X -^S- 
 
 GREEK 12. 
 
 The Athenian. Wachteri naturae, et scripturse concor- 
 dia, No. 259, 260, gives this alphabet the same high anti- 
 quity as the preceding. 
 
 Massey, p. 79. 
 
 Duret, p. 670. 
 
 Le Clabart, p. 603. 
 
 GREEK 13. 
 
 The Molian. Theseus Ambrosius gives this alphabet as 
 very ancient, and under this name. B. C. circa 400. 
 
 Duret, p. 650. 
 Le Clabart, p. 604. 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 217.
 
 120 
 
 CD # 
 
 a b 
 
 i k 
 
 GREEK 14. 
 
 g d e z e th 
 
 <L m, \\z ojm 
 
 1 m n x op 
 
 s t u ph ch ps 6 
 
 GREEK 15. 
 
 bg dezeth 
 
 k 1 m n x 6 p 
 
 r s t u ph ch ps 6 
 
 GREEK 16. 
 
 A B r A EX H 
 
 abgdez eth 
 
 I KAMN=OTT 
 
 i k 1 m n x 6 p 
 
 P S T Y X Jl 
 
 r s t u ph ch 6
 
 121 
 
 GREEK 14. 
 
 Att'tck. So called by Fournier, v. 2. p. 217. Le Cla- 
 bart, p. 491 and 604, says, this alphabet is taken from an- 
 cient medals, inscriptions, and bronzes. Duret, p. 670, 
 gives it the title of Grec Anclen, about B. C. 400. 
 
 GREEK 15. 
 
 Dorick. Le Clabart, p. 605, and Duret, p. 670, in- 
 form us, that this chara&er was brought from the Levant 
 by curious polygraphists and antiquarians. Fournier, v. 2. 
 p. 217, calls it Dorick, B. C. 400. 
 
 GREEK 16. 
 
 Teian. Taken from marbles said to have been of the same 
 antiquity as the Nemean, about B. C. 430. 
 
 Massey, p. 79,
 
 122
 
 123 
 
 GREEK 17. 
 
 Copy of the inscription upon the base of the statue oF 
 Jupiter Urius, the sender of favorable winds, erefted at 
 Chalcedoti, near the entrance of the Bosphorus, by Philb 4 
 the statuary* the son of Antipater, who was patronized by 
 Hephestionj the friend of Alexander the Great. 
 
 The following is a correft reading of it in the modern 
 Greek character, with an English translation. 
 
 Ougtov ex. TrgVfAvyg rig 
 
 Zyvot, K<x}ot. Tgojoruv 
 Etr 6?n KVOIVSKS Sivoit; Sgoftog, ev9& Horeiouv 
 
 KotpTrvXov etXitrtrsi Kvpa Trotgoc, 
 EITS KO. 
 
 rov EUotvTiflov otsi Qeov, AvjiTTarpv 
 iXuv 9 ot.yot.Qqi; <rvpo\ 
 
 See Chishull's corrections at the end of his work. Edit. 
 1728. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 Whoever hence expands his sails, let him 
 from the stern invoke the protection of 
 
 Jupiter Urius. 
 
 Whether towards the Euxine he bend his course, 
 Where Neptune rolls the curling wave among the sands, 
 
 Or seek his return towards the jEgean ; 
 
 To this statue let him offer the votive cake. 
 
 In this interesting attitude, 
 
 Philo, the son of Antipater, 
 
 Represented the benign Deity, 
 
 As an omen of a prosperous voyage.
 
 124 
 
 GREEK 18. 
 
 abgdefze 
 
 01 1C A M N H 
 
 th i k 1 m n x 6 
 
 p r s t u ph ch ps 
 
 GREEK 19. 
 
 AB r A E Z H S 
 
 abgdezeth 
 
 i , K A M N O H 
 
 i klmnxop 
 
 P rTYtpX^.0. 
 
 r s t u ph ch ps 6 
 
 GREEK 20. 
 
 -r 
 
 a bgdezeth 
 
 ik 1 m nxo p 
 
 & ^^2c4X^t 
 
 r s t u ph ch ps 6
 
 125 
 GREEK 18. 
 
 This alphabet was in use in the time of Alexander the 
 
 Great, B. C. 330. 
 
 Dr. Barnard's Table. 
 
 Spanh. Dissert, p. 82. 
 Dr. Morton's Table. 
 
 GREEK 19. 
 
 Taken from the coins of the Antiochi, kings of Syria, 
 three of which name, viz. Antiochus Soter, Antiochus 
 Theos, and Antiochus the Great, reigned from the year 
 242 to 187, B. C. also on those of the Arsasidas and other 
 eastern monarchs, as well as some states of Greece. 
 
 The French virtuosi call them Medatlles perlees. 
 
 Montf. Pal Gr. p. 143. 
 
 GREEK 20. 
 
 Of Virgil. Supposed to have been invented by this poet, 
 who wrote much on magical subjects, but always in an un- 
 known character. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 222. 
 LeClabart, p. 622.
 
 126 
 
 G*EEK 21. 
 
 bgdezeth 
 
 r;m 3:>c* 
 
 i k 1 m n x o p 
 
 JFtfXT ^^ XT 
 
 r s t u ph ch ps 6 
 
 GREEK 22. 
 
 ^B r^,es% H 
 
 abgdefz e 
 
 01 K A M NT 2 O 
 
 th i k 1 m n x 6 
 
 n?PCTY4>X 
 
 p q r s t u ph ch 
 
 GREEK 23. 
 
 TTefHMCJDNOeNTOICOYNOIC 
 XriXCeHTCDTOONOMXCOy. 
 
 exeeTCDHBXcixeixcoy. reNH 
 
 eHTOTOeHXHMXCOyCDC 
 
 eno YNCJD i<\i ern PHC. TON 
 
 Xp TON HMCJDN TON GTTIO YCIO 
 
 HMCJDN . KXI r\f\ YTOI XCf)/OMe
 
 127 
 GREEK 21. 
 
 Of Apollonlus, a celebrated impostor, and Pythagorean 
 philosopher, a few years before Christ. 
 
 Fourn. v.2. p. 222. 
 Duret, p. 132. 
 Le Clabart, p. 620. 
 
 GREEK 22. 
 
 Of Constantine the Great, A. D. 306. 
 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables. 
 Spanh. Dissert, p. 82. 
 Massey, p. 99. 
 
 GREEK 23. 
 
 Afac simile of that ancient and valuable manuscript of 
 the New Testament in the British Museum, presented to 
 King Charles I. in 1628, by Cyrillus Lucaris, patriarch 
 of Alexandria, and is supposed to have been written up- 
 wards of 1400 years. 
 
 The author was favored with this note a few years ago 
 by the late Dr. Woide.
 
 128 
 
 GREEK 24. 
 
 <NB r A 6 S % H 
 
 abgdefz e 
 
 01 K A M N p 
 
 th i k 1 m n x 6 
 
 IT P C T y Km 
 
 pq r stucho 
 
 GREEK 25. 
 
 A E r A.e S Z H 
 
 a bgdefz e 
 
 G I R A M N ^ O 
 
 th i k 1 m n x 6 
 
 n ff ? G TY <l> X 
 
 p q r s t u ph ch 
 GREEK 26. 
 
 abgdefz 
 
 t 
 
 th i k 1 m n x 5 
 
 P <x T Vo8 DC 
 
 p q r s t u ph ch
 
 129 
 GREEK 24. 
 
 Of Justinian the Great, A. D. 527. 
 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables. 
 Massey, p. 99. 
 
 GREEK 25. 
 
 Of Heradlus, A. D. 610. 
 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables. 
 Massey, p. 99. 
 
 GREEK 26. 
 
 Of Leo haurus, A. D. 716. 
 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables. 
 Massey, p. 99.
 
 130 
 
 GREEK 27. 
 
 $ v 
 abgdestze 
 
 -& 5 kXp/yJ o 
 
 th i k 1 m n x 6 
 
 0* p CT T V X oo 
 
 ii r s t u ph ch 6 
 
 GREEK 28. 
 
 abgdezeth 
 
 I K IV U H 5. O 
 
 ik Imnxop 
 
 P O T Y 4> X -t O) 
 
 r s t u ph ch ps 6 
 
 GREEK 29. 
 
 abgdefze 
 
 fKi/^MiNL 
 
 th i k 1 m n x 6 
 
 Tq p OTT<J>o 
 
 p q r s t u ph ch
 
 131 
 GREEK 27. 
 
 This is the earliest specimen of small Greek letters that 
 we have met with, and is found in the Murbac manuscript ; 
 in which it is observable, that the ^ obtains the sixth place, 
 agreeably to the ancient alphabets ; and the iota has the 
 form of the inverted eta, and the up si Ion follows the omi- 
 cron as well as the tau. A. D. 800. 
 
 Montf. Pal. Gr. p. 222. 
 
 GREEK 28. 
 
 This alphabet is taken from the Colbertine MS. of the 
 
 eighth century. 
 
 Montf. Pal. Gr. p. 229. 
 
 GREEK 29. 
 
 This character is copied from Massey, p. 99, and was 
 used in the ninth century in the time of Charlemagne. 
 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables.
 
 132 
 
 GREEK 30. 
 
 \ B r A e z; H e 
 
 abgd e z eth 
 
 i K A M N z * 'n 
 
 i k 1 m n x 6 p 
 
 r s t u ph ch ps 6 
 GREEK 31. 
 
 abgdef z e 
 
 i it r\n n % 6 
 
 thiklmn xo 
 
 4 t s * 7 f <X 
 
 p q r s t u ph ch 
 
 GREEK 32. 
 
 opyiiur 
 
 O T*V cwxffviq Oujitov xa/ 
 ^xUS^r cijrOp oo lul^ro^r ubo 
 
 ony ica^nruxLcrSoocr 1 yn 
 
 yotf for;
 
 133 
 GREEK 30. 
 
 This alphabet is taken from a fragment communicated by 
 Anselm Bandurius, supposed to be of the eighth or ninth 
 century. 
 
 Momf Pal Grace, p. 234. 
 
 GREEK 31. 
 
 The Greek of Basil and Constantine, about A. D. 900- 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables. 
 Massey, p. 99. 
 
 GREEK 32. 
 
 This specimen of small Greek letters, joined together 
 in manuscript, is taken from a copy of Chrysostom s ho- 
 milies on the psalms, in the French King's library ; to 
 which I have subjoined the reading in the modern character. 
 This manner of joining the letters in writing was generally 
 used about A. D. 900. 
 
 Montf. Pal. Grace, p. 274.
 
 134 
 
 GREEK 33. 
 
 Aa B/3 FyfAS Ee Ztf HH 
 a b g -d e z e th 
 
 I/ Kx AA M|u Nv S Oo HTTW 
 iklmnxo p 
 
 Pp? S(V$ XT? Tu *(p X^ *4 Qco 
 r s t u ph ch ps 6 
 
 GREEK 34. 
 
 ^cov o a/ TO/$ f fltvo/^, ay/affflvjTco TO c- 
 <r. fA^erco KI fiouritetot, cry yfwjS'/jrco TO 
 w^ fv y^otvco, xou ftf/ T^^ yn^. TOV 
 
 TOV 
 
 tug 
 
 . OT/ (7 f C/V 
 
 GREEK 35. 
 
 An(pv<; aiotcov, o fcro 1 / fv/ Tot a^/^; oytfwfcfrw T- 
 veto, fA^fTCo a /3ac7/Af/a Tu, yf/votffOco T' 
 
 Tov faffxefw otjUjitfcov TOV emwiov 
 
 Ka/ CtTTe^ OtjU/V TOt
 
 135 
 GREEK 33. 
 
 The alphabet of capitals and small letters, as used at the 
 present time; and cast at the Type Street Foundery, where 
 there are eight sizes of the modern character. 
 
 GREEK 34. 
 
 An authentic copy of the Lord's Prayer, from MAT- 
 THEW VI. v. 9, &c. taken from the best editions of the 
 Greek Testament. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 5. 
 
 GREEK 35. 
 
 This copy of the Lord's Prayer is formed by a combina- 
 tion of various dialefts, and differs from classical Greek, 
 nearly as our provincial dialefts differ from the stile of our 
 best authors. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 6.
 
 136 
 
 GREEK* 
 
 . Kou JLW 
 
 TCO 
 
 GREEK 36, 
 
 , OTTO/" IffS VJ TW #0tV. Ay/- 
 
 TO 
 
 vflt y/vfTot/ /T fv TH y^, w^ 5/5 rev 
 . To 
 
 viyLCLq TOL X^IJLOLTOL KIWWV, /T^ xot/ 
 
 sig TO 
 
 OtWO TO HOMO. AfJL&l. 
 
 GREEK 37. 
 
 7T 
 
 va/ ay/#o>tevov TO ovOjitiX cr; 
 
 BLOL (7, o$ yev^ TO S'f Atijitot (7, coouv yivsTou siq 
 
 TOV y^avov ST/ xa/ f/^ TJIV yviv. Ao 
 
 ^ov 7o xflt$|icf/vov jLtot^ -^w^/. Kot; 
 
 7TQV 
 
 ?rfflW|Ltov. AAAoc g hsvSsgws \JLcnq OLKO 
 
 TOV TTOVVJ^OV. A/fltT/ f^/ XOt/ CT f /Vflt/ J1 j3flW/Af/flt, 
 XOt/ VJ
 
 137 
 GREEK 36. 
 
 This is the version of Hieronymus Megiserus, in Spe- 
 clmine quinquaginta linguarum, A. D. 1603. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 6. 
 
 GREEK 37. 
 
 This reading of the Lord's Prayer is taken from the 
 manuscript of Dan. Castrosius. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 7.
 
 138 
 
 GREEK 38. 
 
 , o 
 
 TO 
 TO 
 
 fT^vj xot/ f/5 TUV yw. To 
 p/vov, ^05 j^a? TO wi(JLgav. 
 
 . K&i 
 
 OT/ f^a f/vflt/ vi 
 siq T&q 
 
 TOV 
 TO 
 
 siq 
 
 CtTTO TOV 
 
 mi vi Buv^pc/?, mi 
 
 Ancient 
 
 V'JV 
 
 xuoov 
 
 CREEK 39. 
 
 Modern 
 
 VOL 
 
 va 
 
 English 
 
 to enter 
 a lord 
 now 
 to go 
 white 
 a lie 
 a coal 
 a horse 
 to assemble 
 that is 
 a dog 
 the teeth
 
 139 
 
 GREEK 38. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, taken from the Venice edition of 
 Maximus Gallipolita, which is commonly used in Greece' 
 at this time. 
 
 Orat. Dom, p. 7. 
 
 GREEK 39. 
 
 A great majority of the words in the modern, are the 
 very same as in the ancient, or classical Greek ; in cases 
 where the ancients had two or more words of the same sig- 
 nification, the moderns have sometimes retained only the 
 best, sometimes the worst, and sometimes equal, as 
 love, for ancient EWJ; aXXor another, for sregof; 
 to love, for (pjXstv; x ov y a year, for e-roj ; va Xsyn to read, 
 for Xsyeiv, &c. In a considerable number of instances, 
 however, they have introduced new words, and if ever the 
 states of Greece, in the revolutions of empires, should 
 flourish again in population and elegance, it may become a 
 subjeft of learned speculation to trace their origin. 
 
 A few examples are given on the annexed page.
 
 140 
 
 NEW GUINEA, 
 
 God 
 
 Wat 
 
 A man 
 
 Sononman 
 
 The devil 
 
 Sytan 
 
 A woman 
 
 Binn 
 
 One 
 
 Oser 
 
 Fish 
 
 Een 
 
 Two 
 
 Serou 
 
 Coco nut 
 
 Sery 
 
 Three 
 
 Kior 
 
 A slave 
 
 Omin 
 
 Four 
 
 Tiak 
 
 Pearls 
 
 Mustiqua 
 
 Five , 
 
 Rim 
 
 Beads 
 
 Fin/in 
 
 Six 
 
 Onim 
 
 Iron 
 
 Ukanmom 
 
 Seven 
 
 Tik 
 
 An axe 
 
 Amkan 
 
 Eight 
 
 War 
 
 Gold 
 
 Bulowan 
 
 Nine 
 
 Siou 
 
 Silver 
 
 Plat 
 
 Ten 
 
 Samfoor 
 
 Copper 
 
 Ganetra 
 
 A house 
 
 Rome 
 
 Brass 
 
 Kasnar 
 
 A knife 
 
 Ensy 
 
 Fire 
 
 For 
 
 A musquet Piddy 
 
 Water 
 
 War 
 
 A cannon 
 
 Piddybebo, 
 
 i A dog 
 
 Naf 
 
 The sun 
 
 Rass 
 
 A cat 
 
 Mow 
 
 The moon 
 
 Pyik 
 
 A rat 
 
 Py 
 
 HELVETIAN. 
 
 Vatter unser, der du hist in himmlen, gehey- 
 ligt werd dyn nam; zukumm uns dijn rijch, 
 dyn will geschahe, wie im himmel, also auch 
 ufferden: gib uns hut unser taglich brot: and 
 vergib uns unsere schulden, wie auch wir ver- 
 gaben unsern schuldneren ; and fuhr uns nicht 
 in versuchnyss, sunder erlos uns von dem 
 bosen. Amen.
 
 141 
 
 NEW GUINEA. 
 
 This island is also known by the name of Papua. 
 This specimen of the language of the inhabitants is ta- 
 ken from the vocabulary. 
 
 Forrest's Voy. p. 401. 
 
 HELVETIAN. 
 
 Swiss. The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 47.
 
 142 
 
 HEBREW. 
 
 Whatever disputes may have arisen among the learned, 
 respecting the antiquity of the Hebrew alphabet, or the 
 manner of writing it, little doubt appears to have been en- 
 tertained of the antiquity of the language itself. The 
 writings of Moses, and the book of Job, are undoubtedly 
 the most ancient compositions acknowledged in Europe. 
 Both these works exhibit a language arrived at a great 
 degree of perfection, and which must have been in use, as a 
 written, as well as an oral tongue, long before these wri- 
 tings were published, or it would have been useless to 
 have written where none could read. * 
 
 Besides a great number of words in the Greek, Arabic, 
 and Celtic, which appear to have been derived from the 
 Hebrew, the very structure of the language points it out 
 as an original one. 
 
 The radical words very uniformly consist of two or 
 three letters, and the derivatives branch out from them in 
 a manner best calculated to produce precision, and con- 
 ciseness of expression. 
 
 The question, respecting the original Hebrew charac- 
 ters, has undergone abundance of discussion, from the 
 times of the first fathers of the Christian church, down to 
 this day. Origen and Jerom, on the authority of the old 
 Rabbis ; and among the moderns, Scaliger, Montfaucon, 
 Chishull, and Dr. Sharpe in his treatise on this subject ; 
 contend, that the Samaritan was the original Hebrew cha- 
 i after, and that the present alphabet was invented after the 
 captivity. 
 
 Origen speaks to this effeft : In the more accurate co- 
 pies of the Old Testament, he says, the sacred name of Je- 
 hovah is aftually written, but in the ancient Hebrew let- 
 
 * Astle on the origin and progress of writing, p. is.
 
 143 
 HEBREW. 
 
 ters, and not in those in use at present, which Esdras is 
 Said to have introduced after the captivity. 
 
 St. Jerom, in his preface to the books of Kings, puts 
 this matter in a still stronger light : he says, the Samaritans 
 often copy the five books of Moses, in the same number 
 of letters as the Jews do, but their letters differ in form, 
 and the use of points ; for it is certain, that Esdras, the 
 Scribe, and a teacher of the law, after the taking of Je- 
 rusalem, and the restoration of the temple under Zoroba- 
 bel, invented those other letters which we now use ; whereas, 
 before that time, the letters of the Samaritans and Hebrews 
 were the same. 
 
 From these passages of Origen and Jerom, we may 
 very certainly conclude, that this was the opinion of the 
 ancient Rabbis and Jewish doftors : but it is very singular, 
 and worthy of notice, that Origen says, that even in his 
 time, the sacred name, in the more accurate copies of the 
 bible used by the Jews themselves, was written in the an- 
 cient or Samaritan, not in the Hebrew or modern alphabet, 
 for both Esdras, and the other rulers of the synagogue, who 
 patronized the use of the new characters, believed them- 
 selves conscientiously bound to preserve the name of Je- 
 hovah in the same letters in which they first received it. 
 
 In support of the opposite opinion, the modern Rabbis, 
 the two Buxtorfs, Wasmuth, Schickard, Lightfoot, and 
 P. Allix, (Spanh. p. 69,) &c. contend, that the alphabet 
 now in use among the Jews, is the same that the Law and 
 Old Testament were origjnally written in from the time of 
 Moses. 
 
 Having stated the nature of the dispute, and some of the 
 principal authors on both sides of the question, I think it 
 right to remind my readers, that it is no part of the design 
 of this work to enter minutely into controversies of this 
 kind.
 
 144 
 
 HEBREW 1. 
 
 HI 1 TT 1 
 
 hhzvhdgba 
 
 # d a fc ^ J - 1 ID 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 *t n icr ~i p y E> ';" 
 
 t sch r q tz p 
 
 HEBREW 2. 
 
 hhz/vhdg b a 
 
 ^U> ^ f H 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 j t5 ma a 2 
 
 t sch r q tz p 
 HEBREW 3. 
 
 hhzv hdg b a 
 
 x f <c e <? 
 
 aa s n m Ik i th 
 
 K # < n 3 c 
 
 t seh r q tz p
 
 145 
 HEBREW 1. 
 
 When the ten tribes revolted from Rehoboam, the son of 
 Solomon, they placed themselves under the direftion of 
 Jeroboam, the son of Nebat, and settled in Judea, where 
 they preserved their ancient letters ; but Esdras, or his son 
 Jesus, who were in the true religion, invented this, from 
 which the present Hebrew is said to be taken. 
 
 Duret, p. 129. 
 
 HEBREW 2 and 3. 
 
 These two alphabets are attributed to King Solomon, by 
 Theseus Ambrosius, in his Appendlce des differentes lettres, 
 et des differentes langues; but he does not offer any autho- 
 rity. He also asserts, that that prince had many treatises 
 written in them, of which, Apollpnius Thianeus was the 
 
 translator and commentator. 
 
 Duret, p. 132 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 1
 
 146 
 
 HEBREW 4. 
 
 T 1 
 
 hh z v h d g b a 
 
 y A j x 3 a * v 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 ' SI W 7 ? 3 > 
 
 t sch r q tz p 
 
 HEBREW 5. 
 
 n t i T 7 j. j <> 
 
 hhzvhdg b a 
 
 y o 1 ^ 3 3 * v 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 > O 3 1? 3 j/ 
 
 i sch r q tz p 
 
 HEBREW 6. 
 
 zv hdgba 
 
 ff^toj^^ 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 sch r q tz p
 
 147 
 HEBREW 4< 
 
 This charafter was very early used by the Jewish Rabbis 
 in Germany, by whom it was much esteemed, as a hand- 
 some current letter, and easy to be written on account of 
 its roundness, wherefore they generally used it in their com- 
 mentaries- and translations. 
 
 Duret, p. 132. 
 
 HEBREW 5. 
 
 This alphabet was used for the same purposes as the pre- 
 ceding, by the Jews of Spain. That both these alphabets 
 were employed for these purposes, is confirmed by Sebas- 
 tian Munster in his Chaldean grammar. 
 
 Duret, p. 132.- 
 
 HEBREW 6. 
 
 This charaftef is taken from an ancient Persian manu- 
 script, but is supposed to be spurious. 
 
 Christ. Ravis.
 
 148 
 
 HEBREW 7. 
 
 n t i n i j a N 
 
 hhzvh d g b a 
 
 V D 3 S 3 i ID 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 ' n IP "i p i; a - 
 
 t sch r q tz p 
 
 HEBREW 8. 
 
 mi3:ii msten "i 1 ? ^3 r 
 
 HEB'REW 9. 
 
 P 7 t> 7 a J 
 
 hhzvhdgba 
 
 JJ t) ^ /? i S * V 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 Y r 
 
 t sch r q tz
 
 149 
 HEBREW 7. 
 
 The modern Hebrew alphabet. This character was cut 
 at the Type-Street Letter Foundery, under the dire&ion 
 of some very learned Rabbis of the Portuguese synagogue 
 in this city. 
 
 HEBREW 8. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, from the Hebrew edition of Muns- 
 
 T. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 9. 
 
 HEBREW 9. 
 
 The alphabet of Rabbinical Hebrew, of which there are 
 three sizes at die Type-Street Foundery.
 
 150 
 
 HEBREW 10. 
 
 JIJPI 1P31 1PP Pfl'P pfc>1 : pfo flfa O'PDP 
 
 PM ")if> 'P' o'pif> ivfa : O'PP op iy PPPIP opif> pni OIPH op 
 
 i?3'1 P'lP P6 0'pifiDUM : 
 
 D'PP '31 l?'") J7PPP ")Df O'PP 
 
 HEBREW 11. 
 
 Abhmu schebbaschschamajim; jikkadhesch 
 schemecha ; tabho malchutecha ; jehi rezone- 
 cha caascher baschschamajim vechen baarez. 
 lachmenu dhebhar jom bejomo then lanu haj- 
 jom ; uselach lanu eth chobhothenu caascher 
 salachnu lebhaale chobhothenu ; veal tebhie- 
 nu lenissajon; ki-im hazzilenu mera ; ki lecha 
 hamalchuth ughebhura vechabodh leolam ol- 
 amim. Amen. 
 
 HUNGARIAN. 
 
 Mi Atyanc ki vagy az mennyekben, ssentel- 
 tessec mega te neved: jojon elaz te orssagod 
 legyen mega te akaratod, mint az menyben, 
 ugy itt ez foldonis ; az mi mindennappi keny- 
 eriinketadd meg nekiincma; es boczasd meg 
 minekiine az mi vetkeinket, mikeppen miis 
 megboczatunc azoknac, az kic mi elleniinc 
 vetkeztenec: es ne vigy minket azkisertetbe.
 
 151 
 HEBREW 10. 
 
 This is a specimen of the Rabbinical Hebrew, taken 
 from the beginning of the Pentateuch. 
 
 HEBREW 11. 
 
 The literal reading of the Lord's Prayer, No. 8. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 9. 
 
 HUNGARIAN. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, from Molnar's Hungarian grammar. 
 
 Wilk Ess. p. 435. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 45.
 
 152 
 
 HOTTENTOT. 
 
 One Koise Bread Ere 
 
 Two Kamse Butter Bingbl 
 
 Three Aruse Cow Go's, Goosa 
 
 Four Gna To I Cow's milk Gosbip 
 
 Five Metuka Good day Dabete 
 
 Six Krubi Horse Hakva 
 
 Seven Gna tigna Table Heid 
 
 Eight Gninka Water Kamma 
 
 Nine TuminkmaMouth Kam 
 
 Ten Gomatse Man Kupp 
 
 Father Ambup Warm Sang 
 
 Mother Andes Knife Nor op 
 
 Brother Carup House Omma 
 
 Sister Cans Eye Mu 
 
 Give Mare Money Mari 
 
 Eyes Mum Breasts Samma, 
 
 Mare //*wj Cap 7^3^ 
 
 Fox Giep Tiger Gvassup 
 
 GC A 
 
 h g 
 
 HUNS. 
 
 n m 1 
 
 H X 
 
 cs
 
 153 
 HOTTENTOT. 
 
 Taken from the vocabulary of the language. 
 
 Thunberg's Travels, Vol. L 
 
 HUNS. 
 
 This people came out of Scythia into Europe, and in 
 the time of Valentinian, A. D. 376, under Attila, made 
 great ravages in France and Italy ; but afterwards at the 
 instance of Pope Leo, settled in Pannonia, which, from 
 the Huns, is now called Hungary. 
 
 This alphabet is copied from Fournier, v. 2. p. 209.
 
 154 
 
 NEW HOLLAND. 
 
 A man 
 
 A woman 
 
 A father 
 
 A son 
 
 Bamboo 
 
 The sun 
 
 The clouds Wulgar 
 
 A stone Walba 
 
 A canoe 
 
 A basket 
 
 Bamma 
 
 Mootjel 
 
 Dunjo 
 
 Tumurre 
 
 Nampar 
 
 Galan 
 
 The head 
 The eyes 
 Bones 
 Blood 
 Wood 
 Fire 
 Earth 
 A lance 
 
 Maragau To eat 
 Yendoo To drink 
 
 To dance Mingooree To swim 
 To paddle Pelenyo Asleep 
 Sand Toowal Fish 
 
 Plantains Wolbit A fly 
 A branch Maiye The beard 
 A dog Cotta The back 
 
 Wageegec 
 
 Meiil 
 
 Baityebai 
 
 Garmbe 
 
 Zoocoo 
 
 Maianang 
 
 Poapoa 
 
 Gulka 
 
 Boota 
 
 Chuchala 
 
 Mailelel 
 
 Wonananeo 
 
 Poteea 
 
 Tabugga 
 
 Waller 
 
 Mocoo 
 
 JACOBITE. 
 
 _&. ^ e\ ^ 
 
 bgdetzsh 
 
 6 K 2JZ & "5 O 
 
 th iklmn x o 
 
 t u ph ch ps
 
 155 
 NEW HOLLAND. 
 
 Taken from the vocabulary of this language. 
 
 Parkinson, p. 148. 
 
 JACOBITE. 
 
 The Jacobites have arranged their alphabet by the Greek, 
 both in name and form, tho' it is much corrupted; they 
 use it chiefly in their holy services ; but, for other purpo- 
 ses employ a character between the Armenian and Tarta- 
 rian ; but this is proper to them. 
 
 Duret, p. 753. 
 
 They are not a nation, but a seel:; after one JACOB a 
 heretic, and disciple of a patriarch of Alexandria, attached 
 
 to the errors of Ne&torius. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 277.
 
 IMPERIAL. 
 
 156 
 
 ab cdefgh 
 
 iklmnopq 
 
 "K"* "^^ c ta ^/ VP \ 5J-P ^^ 
 
 r s tuxyz& 
 
 JAPONESE 1. 
 
 4? &'*'$ r;& ? ^ A tl 
 
 a je i o u fa fe fi 
 
 fo fu ka ke ki ko ku ma 
 
 me mi mo mu ssa sse ssi sso 
 
 H & W %> & <& t <- 
 
 ssu ja je ji jo ju da de 
 
 ^ S'2^>tt6^7?')9 
 
 dsi do tzu ra re ri ro ru 
 
 na ne ni no nu n'a n'e n'i
 
 157 
 IMPERIAL. 
 
 This alphabet is a fourth, attributed to Charlemagne, in 
 the beginning of the ninth century, but seems to have been 
 written for some particular purpose. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 272. 
 
 JAPONESE 1. 
 
 The Japonese have three different alphabets, two of 
 which are in general use among the natives ; the other only 
 at court, and among the great. 
 
 The specimen we have given is the most common, and, 
 like the Chinese, is written from top to bottom. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XXIV.
 
 158 
 
 JAPONESE 2. 
 
 Animal 
 
 Kedamono 
 
 Lion 
 
 Sis 
 
 Arrow 
 
 > 
 
 Laughable 
 
 Okaski 
 
 Back 
 
 Senaka 
 
 Man 
 
 Momo 
 
 Breast 
 
 Mone 
 
 Mother 
 
 Fasa 
 
 Carpenter 
 
 Daiku 
 
 Naked 
 
 Hadaka 
 
 Child 
 
 Kodoma 
 
 Nutmeg 
 
 Nikusuk 
 
 Daughter 
 
 Musme 
 
 Oil 
 
 Abura 
 
 Devil 
 
 Oni 
 
 Oysters 
 
 Otjigaki 
 
 Earth 
 
 Tji 
 
 Parents 
 
 Riofin 
 
 gg 
 
 Tomago 
 
 Pretty 
 
 Migotto 
 
 Face 
 
 Kawo 
 
 Quarrel 
 
 Ijou 
 
 Freeze 
 
 Kogusuru. 
 
 Quick 
 
 Faijo 
 
 Girl 
 
 Komusme 
 
 Rainbow 
 
 Nisi 
 
 GOD 
 
 Sin, kami 
 
 River 
 
 Kawa 
 
 Hand 
 
 Te 
 
 Scratch 
 
 Kesuru 
 
 Heaven 
 
 Gokurakv 
 
 Sun 
 
 Fi, nitji 
 
 Interpreter 
 
 Tsusi 
 
 Tongue 
 
 Sta.Jita 
 
 Itch 
 
 Kasa 
 
 Town 
 
 Matji 
 
 ICELANDIC 1. 
 
 Fader vor thu som ert a himnum, helgest thitt 
 nafn ; tilkome thitt riike, verde thinn vilie, so 
 a jordu, sem a himne: gieffthu oss i dag vort 
 daglegt braud ; og fiergieff oss vorar skulder, 
 so sem vier fiergiefum vorum skuldinautum ; 
 og inleid oss ecke i freistne, heldr frelsa thu 
 oss fra illu; thuiad thitt et riiked, og maatr, 
 og dyrd, in alld er allda. Amen..
 
 159 
 JAPONESE 2. 
 
 This specimen is taken from a very copious vocabulary 
 of the language. 
 
 Thunberg, Vol. 3. p. 1. 
 
 In many of the Japonese words I observe the Roman u, 
 when the rest are in Italic ; as the author is silent respefting 
 them, I presume they have a peculiar sound, for which 
 there is no European accent. 
 
 ^ ICELANDIC 1. 
 
 The language of this island has been preserved so pure, 
 that even the poorest natives can read, and most of them 
 understand the history of their own country. 
 
 Guthrie, p. 454. 
 
 The alphabet used by the Icelanders is the Runic, which 
 see. 
 
 The specimen annexed is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Oral. Dora. p. 23.
 
 160 
 
 ICELANDIC 2. 
 
 Gret ylgur Ragnvald rytto 
 Rom-stamir haukar fromast 
 Kund Lodbrokar; kiendo 
 Kuillinda valir illra : 
 Kuoldrido klarar hreldost 
 Kueid ari mar fast reidar 
 Tijd fiello tar af giodi 
 Tafnlausir aepto hrafnar. 
 
 Thuarr og vid theingils dauda 
 Thydur morg brad, i hijdi 
 Skreidast thui bersi skiaedur 
 Skiott marti grads, of otta : 
 Ox odum falu faxa 
 Frar miog or leiptri tara 
 Huarma beckur ad hrockin 
 Hraut gron a baudar nauti. 
 
 ILLYRIAN 1. 
 
 B TP ^DTi S M tfi 
 
 bvgdex s 
 
 m
 
 161 
 ICELANDIC 2. 
 
 This island having been celebrated for great poets, the 
 annexed stanzas which I have taken from Van Troil's let- 
 ters on Iceland, p. 215, may be pleasing to some of my 
 readers. 
 
 ILLYRIAN 1. 
 
 John Baptist Palatin asserts that the Illyrians have two 
 alphabets : the provinces on the eastern side used that which 
 most resembled the Greek, said to have been invented by 
 St. Cyril ; those on the west, that of St. Jerom, who is 
 reported to be the author of the annexed ; but Aventinus, 
 in the fourth book of his annals, says, that about the time 
 of Christ, a certain person named Methodius, a bishop 
 and native of Illyrium, invented this alphabet ; and trans- 
 lated the holy scriptures into it, persuading the people to 
 discontinue the use of the Latin, and the ceremonies of 
 the Roman church. See CROATIAN. 
 
 Duret, p. 741.
 
 162 
 
 ILLYRIAN 2. 
 
 A S KF A EX L 
 
 ab vgdexz 
 
 H & AM tt II P 
 
 i klmnopr 
 
 C IH 5 $ X it Tin 
 
 s t u f h sch ps sci 
 
 INDIAN 1. 
 
 hhz vhdg b a 
 
 ^^^^i^ <* % 
 
 aa s n ml k i th 
 
 t sc r q ts p 
 
 , INDIAN 2. 
 
 a b gdh vzhh 
 
 th i k 1 m n s aa 
 
 4* fr'* SLJfr 
 
 p tz q r sc t
 
 163 
 ILLYRIAN 2. 
 
 This alphabet is asserted by Palatin, to have been invent- 
 ed by St. Cyril ; it is called Sclavonic, and has much af- 
 finity to the Russian. 
 
 Duret, p. 738. 
 
 
 
 INDIAN 1. 
 
 Nubian. This is thought to have been the original true 
 character of the Abyssinians, but there is some doubt re- 
 specting it. 
 
 Duret, p. 383. 
 
 Le Clabart, p. 614, says, it was taken from the Grimani 
 library at Venice, and brought to Rome in the time of 
 Sixtus IV. in 1482. 
 
 INDIAN 2. 
 
 Modern travellers (1619) inform us, that the oriental 
 Indians, the Chinese, Japonese, &c. form their letters 
 upon this model, writing from top to bottom. Jerome 
 Osorius, book 2 of his history of Portugal, says, the In- 
 dians use neither paper nor parchment, but mark with a 
 pointed tool upon the leaves of the wild palm, and that 
 they have very ancient books composed in this manner. 
 
 Duret, p. 884.
 
 IRISH 1. 
 
 164 
 
 b 1 f s n h d t 
 
 < X & Y A/T O :* 
 
 c cc m g ng i r a 
 
 X ^ 3 * 
 
 o u e i 
 
 1= 
 
 1 
 
 IRISH 2. 
 
 n t s 
 
 =1 
 
 d 
 
 q m g ng sd r a 
 o u e i 
 
 IRISH 3. 
 
 A 
 
 b 1 f 
 
 s r 
 
 h d t c 
 
 m 
 
 n r a o u e 
 
 g. ng 
 P 1 1 -v\"" 
 
 a a 
 
 i eoi ua eg feo oai oai
 
 165 
 IRISH. 
 
 General Valiancy, in his essay on the antiquity of this 
 language, has given a full comparative vocabulary of 
 Irish and Punic-Maltese words, with their significations : 
 also a comparative declension of a noun of each tongue, 
 of the same meaning; and he is decidedly of opinion, 
 that it is, through the Poeni or Carthaginians, derived 
 from the Phenician ; that, on a collation of this language 
 with the Celtic, Punic, Phenician, and Hebrew, the 
 strongest affinity (nay perfect identity in very many words) 
 will appear; and that it may therefore be deemed a Punic- 
 Celtic compound. 
 
 IRISH 1. 
 
 This is the most ancient Irish alphabet, and is said to be 
 named Bobelotk, from certain masters who assisted in form- 
 ing the Japhetian language, but it is obviously denominated 
 from Bobel, Loth, it's two first letters. 
 
 Ledwich's Antiquities, p. 98. 
 
 IRISH 2 and 3. 
 
 These two alphabets, called Irish Ogums, the first named 
 Croabh, and the other 0' Sullivan's, being derivatives from 
 Roman notes, were first stenographic, then steganographic, 
 then magical, and lastly alphabetic. Oga, Ogum, and 
 Ogma are old Celtic words, implying letters written in 
 cypher, and, indireftly, an occult science. Ogan, in 
 
 Welch, is augury, divination. 
 
 Ledwich, p. 90, c.
 
 166 
 
 IRISH 4. 
 
 B P D d J /I 
 
 abed de efg 
 
 XI ft h^X^ 
 
 h i k 1 m n o p 
 IRISH 5. 
 
 1 W n T 5 T 1) 
 
 b 1 n n f s s h 
 
 dtcmmgpr 
 
 /t A K 6 U y ^ 
 
 r. a aouue i 
 IRISH 6. 
 
 bo coil <x^ <xn ctdldm, m<x/i<xe 
 bo nicg;i <ifi neam. Q(/< noi^ou? tdbcftnxut tabon/tb 
 by^n ^ nm. Ql^uy m<ut bum <xji tp<xc<x, m<x/t mi 
 jiKUtmubfle ba^i bpeiCgiDn^b pem. Qfguy n<x leijt 
 pn <x cccitugAb, Q|y y<xo/i in o olc. Oi^i i^t leoi 
 pem otn ^no^f 
 
 7( men.
 
 167 
 IRISH 4. 
 
 This alphabet, which is but an imperfeft one, is called 
 Marcomannic Runes ; the latter word being equivalent in 
 sense, and having the same origin as Ogum. 
 
 Wormius declares, that it agreed with the Runic, both 
 
 in shape and names. 
 
 Ledwich, p. 97. 
 
 IRISH 5. 
 
 This character bears strong marks of a barbarous age, and 
 is, no doubt, the remains of an old magical alphabet ; it 
 is called Bethluhnion na Ogma, or the alphabet of magical 
 or mysterious letters, the first three of which are Beth, 
 Luis, Nion, whence it is named. 
 
 Ledwich, p. 99. 
 
 IRISH 6. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer in the Bethlulsnion character, " Ex 
 
 editione Boyleana. Lond." 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 57. 
 
 This letter wa cast at the Letter Foundery in Type 
 Street.
 
 168 
 
 IRISH 7. 
 
 Ar nathair ata ar neamb, naomhthar hainm : 
 tigeadh do rioghachd, deuntar do thoil ar an 
 ttalamh, mar do nithear ar neamb ; ar naran 
 laeathamhail tabhair dhiiinn a niu ; agus ma- 
 ith dhuinn ar bhfiacha, mar mhaithm idne dar 
 bhfeitheamnuibh fein : agus na leig sinn a ca 
 thughadh, achd saor inn 6 olc : oir is leachd 
 
 ITALIAN 1. 
 
 Padre nostro, che sei ne' cieli, sia santificato 
 il tuo nome ; il tuo regno venga ; la tua volun- 
 ta sia fatta, si come in cielo, cosi an che in ter- 
 ra : dacci hoggi il nostro pane cotidiano ; e ri- 
 mettici i nostri debiti, si come noi anchora gli 
 rimettiamo a' nostri debitori : e non c'indurci 
 in tentatione, ma liberaci dal maligno : perci- 
 
 ITALIAN. 2. 
 
 Padre nostro, che sei nel cielo, sia sanftificato 
 il tuo nome ; il tuo regno venga ; la tua vo- 
 lunta sia fatta, sic come in cielo cosi anche in 
 terra : dacci oggi il nostro pane cotidiano : e 
 remittici i nostri debiti, sic come noi ancora 
 rimittiamo a nostri debitori; e non inducici 
 in tentazione ; ma liberaci dal maligno ; per- 
 cio che tuo e il regno, e la potenza, e la glo- 
 ria in sempiterno. Amen.
 
 169 
 
 IRISH 7. 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer, from the Biblia 
 Hibernica, Lond. 1690. 
 
 .Orat. Dom. p. 57. 
 Vallancey, p, 62. 
 
 ITALIAN 1. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer; Edit. Genev. 1607. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 ITALIAN 2. 
 
 The Italian language of the present age is much admired 
 for it's softness, and is spoken by the accomplished in 
 most parts of Europe ; it is derived from the ancient Ro- 
 man or Latin. It would require a volume to trace the 
 changes which gradually converted the old Roman into the 
 language of the present Italians, which is now so polished 
 in point of sound, and rendered so harmonious, as to be 
 thought the best adapted to poetry and music, of any lan- 
 guage in the world. The Italian states have different dia- 
 lefts, of which the Tuscan is esteemed the most correft and 
 elegant. 
 
 The annexed is the modern reading of the Lord's Prayer.
 
 170 
 
 ITALIC. 
 
 ABCDEFGHI}KLM 
 NOPQRSTUVWXYZ 
 
 abed efg h ij k I mn 
 op q rfs tuvwxyz& 
 
 KAMTCH ATKA. 
 
 GOD Kutcha The head Ktchuin 
 
 The sky Keis The nose Kayakan 
 
 Father Inich The eye Leila 
 
 Mother Lachtcha The ear Ilia 
 
 Son Pacha The mouth Chauua 
 
 Daughter SchuguindK tongue Etchella 
 
 Brother Tuiya A beard Luulla 
 
 Sister Milichlch Shoulders Tuinuinga 
 
 Husband Kamjam The hand Chkatch 
 
 Wife Ikitch A finger Pkotcha 
 
 Boy Panaktcha The belly Haltki 
 
 Man UtschkaryaThe back Higatch 
 
 A leg /%i^ The flesh
 
 171 
 
 ITALIC. 
 
 The capital and lower-case letters, as now in general 
 use in Europe. This alphabet was called Venetian, from 
 it's having been originally cut at Venice ; also Lettres Al- 
 dines, from Aldus Manutius, who invented it about 1512. 
 It is now universally known by the name of Italic. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 264. 
 
 KAMTCHATKA. 
 
 This specimen of the language is taken from the Voca- 
 bularia linguarum totius orbis comparative, collected by 
 command of the late Empress of Russia. 2 vols. 4to. 
 Petersburg, 1786.
 
 172 
 
 LATIN 1. 
 
 A B C D E f *C H 
 
 I K L M N o P Q. 
 R S T *V + X + Y , 
 
 LATIN 2. 
 
 AB^OEFCH 
 
 i K. ix H N o P a 
 
 K S T V X T * 
 
 LATIN 3, 
 
 -\BCD EF6H 
 
 T K I At N f Q. 
 
 1^ ^ T V X T %
 
 173 
 LATIN. 
 
 The language of the ancient inhabitants of Italy appears 
 to have had the same origin as that of Greece. See ETRUS- 
 CAN and GREEK. 
 
 It obtained the name of Latin from that part of Italy, 
 formerly called Latium, whence the Romans were ambi- 
 tious of deducing their descent. As this people devoted 
 themselves almost entirely to wars, for the purpose of ex- 
 tending their empire, and exalting the glory of the Roman 
 name, they paid little attention to the fine arts, 'till they 
 had nearly enslaved the whole world and themselves : this 
 was, doubtless, the reason that they were contented with 
 the Greek alphabet in it's original unimproved state. 
 <4 Pliny, Book VII. chap. 58, says, " The original Greek 
 " alphabet was nearly the same as the present Latin, as ap- 
 " pears by the Delphic inscription." Tacitus, Book XI. 
 of his annals, says, " the form of the Latin letters is the 
 " same as that of the most ancient Greek." 
 
 It is unnecessary to inform the historical reader, that 
 the Romans extended their conquests, and planted a very 
 perceptible portion of their language in every cultivated 
 part of Europe, Asia, and Africa ; and that the present 
 Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, and French, are only dia- 
 lefts of it. 
 
 LATIN 1. 
 
 This appears to be the most ancient Latin alphabet, and 
 is called Ionic, the five letters marked * excepted, which 
 have been added since. This character was used about 
 B. C. 714. 
 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables. 
 Spanheim, p. 114. 
 
 LATIN 2. 
 
 This alphabet was called Ionic and Attic, on account of 
 their derivation from the Greeks of these names, and were 
 in use between six and seven hundred years before Christ. 
 It is said to be the foundation of the Roman alphabet 
 now universally adopted. 
 
 Fourn. v, 2. p. 268 
 
 LATIN 3. 
 
 This alphabet was in use at the beginning of the Chris- 
 tian JE,ra, 
 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables, 
 Spanheim, p. 114.
 
 174 
 
 LATIN 4. 
 
 A BCDtfGH 
 I K L M N ? d 
 
 R ,s r v 
 
 LATIN 5. 
 
 s T ^ 
 
 LATIN 6. 
 
 71 J T XI
 
 175 
 LATIN 4. 
 
 This alphabet appears to have been generally used about 
 A.D. 306. 
 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables. 
 Spanheim, p. 114. 
 
 LATIN 5. 
 
 This charafter, exhibiting a gradual improvement, was 
 employed A. D. 400. 
 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables. 
 Spanheim, p. 114. 
 
 LATIN 6. 
 
 We find this alphabet in use about the year A. D. 500. 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables. 
 Spanheim, p. 114.
 
 176 
 
 LATIN 7. 
 
 Abode F 9 h 
 
 I K: L CY) N o p *\ 
 
 R s T* UL x 
 
 LATIN 8. 
 
 I X t, H \ 5 P 
 
 Q A ,y r 
 
 LATIN 9. 
 
 Pater noster, qui es in coelis : san&ificetur no- 
 men tuum : adveniat regnum tuum, fiat vo- 
 luntas tua, sicut in ccelo, et in terra; panem 
 nostrum supersubstantialem da nobis hodie: 
 et dimitte . nobis debita nostra, sicut et nos 
 dimittimus debitoribus nostris : et ne nos indu- 
 cas in tentationem, sed libera nos a malo, quia 
 tuum est regnum, et potentia, et gloria in se- 
 cula seculorum, Amen.
 
 177 
 LATIN 7. 
 
 This Latin alphabet appears to have been used in the se- 
 venth century. 
 
 Montf. Pal. Graec. p. 216. 
 
 LATIN 8. 
 
 This alphabet is taken from the Eugubian tables, and is 
 called Arcadian, it being supposed to have been brought 
 from that country by Evander, into Latium. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. VIII. 
 
 LATIN 9. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, from the celebrated vulgate edition 
 of St. Jerom. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 33.
 
 178 
 
 LATIN 10. 
 
 Pater noster qui es in ccelis, san&ificetur no 
 men tuum ; veniat regnum tuum : fiat volun^ 
 tas tu a, quemadmodum in ccelo, sic etiam in 
 terra: panem nostrum quotidianum da nob is 
 hodie : et remitte nob is debita nostra, sicut et 
 nos remittimus debitoribus nostris : et ne indu- 
 cas nos in tentationem, sed libera nos a malo, 
 quia tuum est regnum, et potentia, et gloria, 
 in secula. Amen. 
 
 LATIN 11. 
 
 Pater noster, qui es in ccelis, san&e colatur 
 nomen tuum ; veniat regnum tuum ; fiat vo- 
 luntas tua, ut in ccelo, sic in terra ; et remitte 
 nobis debita nostra, ut et nos remittimus de- 
 bitoribus nostris : neve nos in tentationem in- 
 ducito, sed a malo tuere; quoniam tuum est 
 regnum, et potentia, et gloria, in sempiternum. 
 Amen t 
 
 LATIN 12. 
 
 Pater noster, qui es in ccelis, sanftificetur no- 
 men tuum. Adveniat regnum tuum ; fiat vo- 
 luntas tua, ut in ccelo, ita etiam in terra. Pa- 
 nem nostrum quotidianum da nobis hodie. Et 
 remitte nobis debita nostra, sicut et nos remit- 
 timus debitoribus nostris. Et ne nos inducas 
 in tentationem, sed libera no ab illo improbo 
 quia tuum est regnum, et potentia, et gloria, 
 in secula. Amen.
 
 179 
 
 LATIN 10. 
 
 This reading of the Lord's Prayer is copied from the 
 Novum Testamentum Jesu Christi filii Dei, ex Versione 
 Erasmi. Basil. 1570. 
 
 LATIN ll. 
 
 Copied from Castellio's Biblia Sacra. Frankf. 1697. 
 
 LATIN 12. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, taken from Beza's folio edition, 
 Genev. 1598.
 
 180 
 
 LAPLAND. 
 
 Isa meidhen, joko oledh tajuahissa; puhettu 
 olkohon siun nimesi: tul kohon siun vvalta- 
 kunta ; si olkohon siun tahtosi, kwuin tai va- 
 hissa, nyn man'palla, meiden jokapaivven lei- 
 pa anna mehilen tana paivvane, ja anna ante- 
 ixe meiden syndia ; kwuin moe annamma vas- 
 tahan rickoillen : ja ale sata mei ta kin sauxen 
 
 LETTICE. 
 
 Musso taswss kass eeksch daebbaesim. Swaet- 
 tizlay toop tauwss wardz. Laey eenak mumss 
 tawa kiaemna walstiba, tawss yraatz lay note- 
 ek ta wirss saene maess kaeeksch daebbaesim. 
 Musu deenisku maisi dod mumss schoden : un 
 pedod mums mussus paraduss ka maess peedo- 
 dam muussim paradneekim. Un nae eewaedd 
 
 LITHUANIAN. 
 
 Tewe musu kursey esi danguy, szweskis war- 
 das tawo ; ateyk karaliste tawo, buk wala ta- 
 wo kayp and dangaus teyp ir andziam es : do- 
 nos musu wisu dienu dok mumus szedien ; ir 
 atlayisk mums musu kaltes kayp ir mes atlay- 
 dziam sawiemus kaltiemus: ir newesk musu 
 ing pagundynima; bet giaf bekmus nog pik* 
 to. Amen.
 
 181 
 LAPLAND* 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Duret, p. 869. 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 44. 
 
 LETTICE. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 84. 
 
 LITHUANIAN. 
 
 This is the Lord's Prayer, taken from a bible published 
 in this language. Lond. 1660. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 43.
 
 182 
 
 LlVONIAfr. 
 
 Tabes mus, kas tu es eck sckan debbessis : 
 schwe titz tows: waarcz enack mums tows 
 walstibe ; tows praatz buska, ksch kan debbes, 
 ta wursan summes : musse denische mayse du 
 th mums schodeen; pammate mums musse 
 grake, ka mess pammart musse parradueken : 
 ne wedde mums louna badeckle : pett passat- 
 za mums nu'wusse loune. Amen. 
 
 LOMBARD. 
 
 lv.b C 4 V f 9 h 
 
 abcdefgh 
 
 i I m n b p q r 
 
 i 1 m n o p q r 
 
 r <r u x v x 
 
 s t u x y z 
 
 LUSATIAN. 
 
 fVs.j >i 
 
 Wosch nasch, kensch sy nanebebu, wss wes- 
 chone bushy me twove : pos hish knam krai- 
 lestwo twojo: so stany woli tuoja, takhak ma- 
 nebu, tak heu nasemu : klib nasch schidni day 
 nam shensa ; a woday nam wyni nashe, ack 
 my wodawamij wini kam naschim: neweshi 
 nass dospitowana : a le wimoshi nas wot slego 
 psheto twojo jo to kralestvo ata moz, ata zest
 
 183 
 
 LlVONIAN. 
 
 This is also the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Duret, p. 869. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 42. 
 
 LOMBARD* 
 
 Said to be a Latin alphabet, and to have been used by 
 the Lombards. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 270. 
 Le Clabart, p. ,524. 
 
 LUSATIAN. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 42.
 
 184 
 
 MADAGASCAR 1. 
 
 Meaz trangubas tambook trangue vattes Iran 
 gue ambone haze, lawa verwan lawa samme 
 samme, trangue France, misse sea lande voo- 
 langondre, voolcosse voolangombe mene me- 
 inte monguemongue vaque tootolabi. Oola 
 se meaz moosquine mawoose rez ampaangui- 
 naira oola meaz manne mahaira vinsi ampan- 
 guinaira. -Samboorre trangano menewali. 
 Zaa teaco. Hanho awyee autanne Madagas- 
 car? Zahai mitondre marmare. Magnina? 
 Angue, arrey, voora fooshe, sable, firak, lamb, 
 satroo, angamara. Sos annos anniette. Za- 
 hai rawoo. Magnina foo annotea? Zahai 
 tea, engombe, edgondri, enosse, envoosse, ac- 
 coo, attoole, fuie, vassarre, toolooga, voiengu- 
 embe, fooshe varre. 
 
 MADAGASCAR 2. 
 
 Amproy antsica izau hanautangh andanghitsi 
 angharanau hofissahots, yahoiiachanau hoaui 
 aminay, fitejannau hoefaizangh an tane toua 
 andangithsi ; mahou mehohanau anrou aniou 
 abinaihane antsica, amahanau manghafaca ha- 
 nay ota antsica; tonazahai manghafaca hota 
 anreo mauouanay: amanhanau aca mahatet- 
 seanay abin fiuetseuetsie ratsi, feha hanau me- 
 te zahahanay tabin haratsi an abi. Amin.
 
 185 
 MADAGASCAR 1. 
 
 Specimen of the language of this island, collected from 
 the Chansons Madegasses, by the Chev. de Porny, Paris, 
 1787. The following is a translation, copied from second 
 volume of the Monthly Magazine, p. 937. 
 
 " They will toil to build fine houses of wood and stone, with 
 " great doors and windows, like those of France, decked with 
 " cloths of silk, wool, mohair, ox-hair, red, black, yellow, 
 " green, and all colors." " The man who toils not is poor, 
 
 and hungers, but the man who toils gets drunk, and grows 
 ( rich." " Take the house of my wife." " I consent to 
 
 * it." " Why come you to the land of Madagascar ?" " I 
 
 * come to bring thee much." " What is it ?" " Coral, 
 ' necklaces, beads, copper, tin, cloth, hats, shoes." " Thou 
 ' art welcome." " Glad of it." " What desires thy heart?" 
 
 "I want beef, mutton, goats, capons, eggs, fruits, lemons, 
 " oranges, limes, beans, and white rice." 
 
 MADAGASCAR 2. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, from Fiacourt's history of Mada- 
 gascar. 
 
 Wilk Ess. p. 435. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 32.
 
 186 
 
 MAGINDANO. 
 
 GOD 
 
 Alatalla 
 
 One 
 
 ha 
 
 Angel 
 
 Malaycet 
 
 Two 
 
 Daua 
 
 Man 
 
 Tow 
 
 Three 
 
 Tulu 
 
 Woman 
 
 Eabye 
 
 Four 
 
 Apat 
 
 Brother 
 
 Pagaly 
 
 Five 
 
 Lima 
 
 Cheek 
 
 Pisni 
 
 Six 
 
 Anom 
 
 Blood 
 
 Lugu 
 
 Seven 
 
 Pctoo 
 
 Coach 
 
 Carosse 
 
 Eight 
 
 Walu 
 
 Dance 
 
 Magsaut 
 
 Nine 
 
 Seaow 
 
 Duck 
 
 Pattu 
 
 Ten 
 
 Sanpoolu 
 
 Goose 
 
 Gansa 
 
 Glass 
 
 Chirming 
 
 Gun 
 
 Sanapan 
 
 Hog 
 
 Babuey 
 
 Drum 
 
 Tamboor 
 
 Fish 
 
 Sura, suda 
 
 Hammer 
 
 Dongsu 
 
 House 
 
 Watty 
 
 Heaven 
 
 Langit 
 
 Iron 
 
 Pootow 
 
 Hell 
 
 Inferno 
 
 Kiss 
 
 Pugharo 
 
 MALABARIC 1. 
 
 Vanan galil yrucra engal pi dave ; unureya na 
 mam ellatcum chutamga; unureya irakiam 
 vara, un manadin paryel a navargal vanatil ; 
 cheyuma pelepumylum elarum cheya : andan- 
 dulla engal pileycaran carracucu nangal pava 
 carangaley perru : engaley tolxatricu e duva- 
 gu ottade engalucu : polangn varamal vilagu. 
 Amen.
 
 187 
 MAGINDANO. 
 
 This island, which is one of the Philippines, is called 
 by Lord Anson, in his celebrated voyage, Mindanao. The 
 annexed specimen of the language is taken from the voca- 
 bulary, in 
 
 Forrest's Voy. p. 389. 
 
 MALABARIC 1. 
 
 The literal reading of the Lord's Prayer, from Baldeus's 
 introduction to this language. Amst. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 27.
 
 188 
 
 MALABARIC 2. 
 
 Paramandalang gellile irukkira engel pidawe. 
 Ummudejia namum artschikka padduwadaga. 
 Ummudejia ratschijura wara. Ummudejia sit- 
 tum paramandalattile scheja padumapole pu- 
 mijilejum scheja padduwagada. Annannulla 
 engel oppum engellukku innudarum. Engel 
 cadencararukku nangel porukkuma pole nir- 
 um engel cadengelei engellukku porum. En- 
 gelei tschodineijile piraweschija dejum. Analo 
 tinmeijile ninnu engelei letschittukollum. A- 
 dedendal ratschiammum pelamum magimeij- 
 um ummakku ennenneikkumundajirukkudu. 
 Amen. 
 
 MALABARIC 3. 
 
 Unnu undu, rendu rindu, mundu, nalu 
 
 1 234 
 
 anji anju, aru, elu, ettu ittu, ombedu, 
 
 5678 9 
 
 pattu, pattinendu, pattirendu, pattimun- 
 
 10 11 12 13 
 
 du, pattinalu, pattinanju, pattinaru, 
 
 14 15 16 
 
 pattinelu, pattinettu, pattinombedu, 
 
 17 18 19 
 
 iruedu, iruedondu, muppedu, natpcdu 
 20 21 30 40
 
 189 
 MALABARIC 2. 
 
 Another reading of the Lord's Prayer in the dialeft of 
 Oral. Dom. Amst. p. 25. 
 
 MALABARIC 3. 
 
 Taken from the vocabulary of numeration, Thunberg, 
 y. 4. p. 253. but this author seems silent as to the language.
 
 190 
 
 MALABARIC 4. 
 
 r*3 ^^LoFDo $> 0T X & 
 
 a a i I u u ru ru 
 
 6*0 -gtj *6) 6)^6) -ft -6J3 /-fiafi/^as 
 
 lu lu e ai o au am ah 
 
 <& /QA c/O ej <3_aA .nJ3IJ3u> 
 
 k kk g gg ngh c cc g gg 
 
 gn t tt d dd n t tt d 
 
 CJ (U nj rxiD -ffU 3 A S^U HI 
 dd n p pp b bb m j T 
 
 e* } ^j v/9 ofi ro? /xO ^S 
 
 1 v s sz s h 1 kc 
 
 MALAYAN 1. 
 
 t ' .- C J ' 
 
 Ci)Ji.>w CX>y Qw<3 C 
 
 I O I '. O 
 
 j CXxJ 
 
 O-' s J & ,* 
 
 _> cXj^o .L> 
 
 j (^ 

 
 191 
 MALABARIC 4. 
 
 This is the most correft alphabet in use in the Malabar 
 country, whence great care has been taken to obtain it, the 
 first sixteen letters being vowels, and the remaining thirty- 
 five being simple consonants, or radicals. 
 
 Propag. Fide, v. 2. 
 
 MALAYAN 1. 
 
 The Malayan alphabet is the same with the Arabic. 
 The annexed specimen is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 20. 
 
 Guthrie says this language is thought to be the most pure 
 of any in all the Indies, p. 228.
 
 192 
 
 MALAYAN 2. 
 
 Bappa kita, jang adda de surga, namma mou 
 jadi bersakti, radjat-mu mendarang, kandha- 
 timu menjadi de bumi seperti de surga, roti 
 kita derri sa hari-hari membrikan kita sa hari 
 inila, makka ber-ampunla pada-kita doosa ki- 
 ta, seperti kita berampun-akan siapa ber-sala 
 kapada kita, d'jang-an hentar kita kapada tjo 
 bahan, tetapi lepasken kita dari jang d'jakat : 
 karna mu pun'ja radjat, daan kauwassahan, 
 daan berbassaran sampey kakakal, Amin. 
 
 English 
 
 MALAYAN 3. 
 
 High Malay Low Malay 
 
 The sun 
 
 Veiloo 
 
 Matt'aree 
 
 The moon 
 
 Saoo 
 
 Boolang 
 
 The stars 
 
 Nacaistrum 
 
 Beentang 
 
 The sky 
 
 Vanum 
 
 Langee 
 
 Fire 
 
 Tee 
 
 Appee 
 
 Water 
 
 Tanee 
 
 Aier 
 
 A man 
 
 Manizen 
 
 Lakee lakee 
 
 A woman 
 
 Oroopinnoo 
 
 Parampooan 
 
 Morning 
 
 Caluttoo 
 
 Pagee 
 
 Noon 
 
 Ooteha 
 
 Taingaree 
 
 Evening 
 
 Eraoo 
 
 Soree 
 
 Eyes 
 
 Canna 
 
 Matta 
 
 Ears 
 
 Cadoo 
 
 Cooping 
 
 Cheeks 
 
 Caowda 
 
 Peepee
 
 Hit 
 
 193 
 MALAYAN 2. 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer, copied from the Ma- 
 lay Testament, Edit. Oxf. 1677, in the author's posses- 
 sion. 
 
 MALAYAN 3. 
 
 A comparison between the High and Low Malay; the 
 former spoken at Anjenja on the Malabar coast, and called 
 at Batavia the HIGH, or proper; the latter used at Batavia, 
 where it is commonly called the Low. 
 
 Park. Voy. p. 184 and 195.
 
 194 
 
 MALAYAN 4. 
 
 Bapa de somonio, de somonio dunia, 
 
 De somonio nigri sujud ; [ry Selam ; 
 
 Dery Christan, dery Cafer, dery Hindoo, de- 
 Deos, Jehovah, Tuan Alia ! 
 
 Cassi scio ari iko, makanan, dangang riskimo ; 
 
 Somonio lain apo apo, 
 Tuan tow callo by cassi, callo tida, 
 
 Tuan alia punio suko. 
 
 Adjar scio syang atee, lain oran punio chela, 
 Adjar scio tutup matto, lain oran punio 
 
 Bugimano scio ampong summo lain oran, 
 Cassi ampong summo scio. 
 
 MALAYAN 5. 
 
 Oo
 
 195 
 MALAYAN 4. 
 
 ' The annexed are three stanzas of Pope's celebrated 
 poem, DEO OPTIMO MAXIMO, or Universal Prayer, in 
 the Malayan tongue, translated by Capt. Forrest. 
 
 Forrest's Voy. p. 293. 
 
 MALAYAN 5. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer in a dialeft much differing from that 
 
 given in No. 1. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 19.
 
 196 
 
 MALAYAN 6. 
 
 Bapa kami jang ada di surga, nama moe diso- 
 etsjiken, karadjaan-moe didatangi, kahendac- 
 moe djadilah di boemi seperti dalam surga, re- 
 ziki kami deri sahari hari debrikan akan ka- 
 mi pada hari ini. Daan mengampon akan ka- 
 mi dosa kami seperti kami mengampon akan 
 barang siapa jang bersalah akan kami; daan 
 
 MANDARINE 1. 
 
 Cai tien ngo tern fu c'he ngo tern yuen. Ul 
 mini c'him xim. Ul que lin. Kei (lai) ul chi 
 c'him him yu ti ju yh tien. Yen ngo tern u- 
 am ul km je yu ngo ngo je yum learn. Ul 
 mien ngo chai yu ngo ye xe fii ngo chaj che. 
 Yeu pu ngo hiu hien yu yeu kan. Nai kieii 
 ngo yu hium 60. Que nem fo xi ul yu uu 
 kium xi chi xi. ya men. 
 
 MANDARINE 2. 
 
 Sci gin ta fu ciu zai tien tin. Ngo juon tafu- 
 min je hhien jam. Ngo juon su gin ciuon sci- 
 eu cui chiai ye. Giu tien gin suo zum ta fun- 
 go juon ta fu foin chungo. Ngo juon ta fii 
 ssi ngo yi cie. Ngo juon ta fu cio ngo ci zui 
 gin gio hai ngo je cie ci. Ngo juon ta fu jeu 
 ngo guei scien pu mi zui hoh. Ngo juon ta 
 fa chien ngo cu nan. Amin.
 
 197 
 MALAYAN 6* 
 
 The literal reading of the preceding Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 19. 
 
 MANDARINE 1. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 30. 
 
 MANDARINE 2. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435.
 
 198 
 
 MANGEEAN. 
 
 English 
 
 Mangeean 
 
 Otaheitean 
 
 A cocoa nut 
 
 Eakkaree 
 
 Aree 
 
 Bread-fruit 
 A canoe 
 
 Kooroo 
 Ewakka 
 
 Ooroo 
 Evaa 
 
 A man 
 
 Taata 
 
 Taata 
 
 A friend 
 Cloth plant 
 Good 
 A club 
 
 Naoo, mou 
 Taia aoutee 
 Mata 
 Pooroohee 
 
 Eoute 
 Myty 
 
 Yes 
 
 Aee 
 
 Ai 
 
 No 
 
 Aoure 
 
 Aoure 
 
 A spear 
 A battle 
 A woman 
 
 Heyhey 
 Etamagee 
 Waheine 
 
 Tamaee 
 Waheine 
 
 A daughter 
 The sun 
 
 Maheine Maheine 
 Heetaia matooa 
 
 I 
 
 Ou 
 
 Wou 
 
 MANKS. 
 
 Ayr ain, t'ayns Niau ; Casherick dy rou dt'en- 
 nym, Dy jigg dty Reereeaght : Dt'aigney dy 
 rou jeant er y Talloo myr ta ayns Niau. Cur 
 dooin nyn Arran jiu as gagh laa. As leih do- 
 om nyn Loghtyn myr ta shin leih dauesyn ta 
 janoo loghtyn ny noi shin. As ny leeid shin, 
 ayns Miolagh. Agh livrey shin veih oik : Son 
 liats y Reereeaght y Phooar as y Ghloyr son 
 dy bragh as dy bragh. Amen.
 
 199 
 MANGEAN. 
 
 A comparison between the languages of Mangeea and 
 Otaheite, from the vocabulary. 
 
 Cook's Voy. Vol.1, p. 177. 
 
 MANKS. 
 
 Guthrie, p. 720, says, the language used by the natives 
 is radically Erse, or Irish, with a mixture of Latin, Greek, 
 Welch, and English words ; which composition is called 
 Manis. 
 
 The annexed specimen is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Bishop Wilson's Works, Vol. 1. p. 460.
 
 200 
 
 MELINDANA. 
 
 Aban ladi fissan auari; It cades esmoftadi. 
 Mala cutoca. Tacuna mascitoca coma fissame 
 Chidaleca ghlalandi. Cobzano chefasona ag- 
 tona fill aume. Agsar lena Cataiano nacfar le- 
 man lena galaia. Vualo tadcholnal tagarabe. 
 Lache nagna min ssciratri. Amin. 
 
 MEND^EAN. 
 
 o T ; ** y x. o 
 
 hhzvhdcb a 
 
 5* co V ^"* -J -^ z Si 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i t 
 
 A AA L 2 \r 
 
 t sh r q tz p 
 
 MEXICAN. 
 
 Ore rure u bacpe Ereico: Toicoap pavemga 
 tu a va. Ubu jagatou oquoa vac. Charai ba- 
 mo derera reco Oreroso leppe wacpe. Toge 
 mognanga dere mi potare vbupe wacpe ige 
 monangiave. Ara ia vion ore remiou zimeeng 
 cori oreve : de guron orevo ore come moa sa- 
 ra supe oregiron jave ; Epipotarume aignang 
 orememoauge ; Pipea pauem gne ba ememo- 
 an ore suy. Emona.
 
 201 
 MELINDANA. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 2&. 
 
 MEND^AN* 
 
 The Mendes are a people of Egypt. This alphabet was 
 formed from the Syriac. A. D. 277. 
 
 Drs. Barnard and Morton's Tables, 
 
 MEXICAN* 
 This is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 63, 
 Duret, p. 944.
 
 202 
 
 MERCIAN. 
 
 jrinr B r <> 
 
 b c d 
 
 s 
 H / L M T /V f O 
 
 h i 1 m n o 
 
 OOOoPRP/t 
 
 th 
 
 MOHAWK. 
 
 Songwaniha ne karongiage tigsideron. Wes- 
 agsanadogegtine. Saianaertsera iwe. Tagserre 
 Egniawan karongiagon siniiugt oni ohwonsi- 
 age. Niadewigniserage tagkwanadaranondags- 
 ik nonwa. Tondagwarigwiiugston ne iungwa- 
 rigwannerre siniiugtoni siagwadaderigwiiugs- 
 tani. Neoni togsa dawagsarinet dewadaderag- 
 eragtonge. Ne sane saedsiadagwags ne kond- 
 igserohase. Ikaen saianertsera ne naah, neoni 
 ne kaeshatstenh, neoni ne onwesegtaksera, ne 
 siniahaenwe. Amen.
 
 203 
 MERCIAN. 
 
 These alphabets occur on the Anglo-Saxon coins of 
 Eatwaid, and OfFa and his Queen, of which a plate, with 
 a great variety, is given in Pinkerton's Essay on Medals, 
 Vol. 2. taken from Hickes's Thesaurus. 
 
 MOHAWK. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 89.
 
 204 
 
 MOLDAVIAN. 
 
 Otze nasi ezie esae na nebesech : Da sbetaetse 
 seme tboe : Da praedet tzarstbie tboe : Da bai- 
 det bole tboe iako na nebesech ae na zemlae ; 
 Chliab nasi nasestniae dazit nam denes : JE, os- 
 tabae nam delggae nase sakozie aemae ostablem 
 dailzaenikom nasaem : ^E nebaibedae nasi beae- 
 skusevje : Nai acsbabae nas ot laikabago : Iako 
 tboe est tzarstbo ae saela ae slaba otzu ae s'inu 
 
 MOLQUEEREI^. 
 
 Oes Veer der iin de hiim'len binne. Jimme 
 nemme word heil'ge. Jimme keuniink-riike 
 kom to. Jimme wolle geschied op d'ierde alli- 
 ik as iin de hiimmel. Joeoe oes joe oes dageli- 
 iks broeoe. En vorjoeoe oes oes schjolden, al- 
 liik as wi vorgoeoe oes schjold'ners. Ende en 
 leide oes naat ein vorsiekiinge, mar vorlos oes 
 van de kwoeoe. Want jimmes iis 'et keuniin^ 
 
 MONK'S. 
 
 Al>< >< fcCH 
 
 abcdefgh 
 
 H- k M N O t> k Y 
 
 i 1 m n o p r s 
 
 -r u v y 
 
 t. u w y
 
 205 
 MOLDAVIAN. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, taken from a manuscript in the Bod- 
 leian library. 
 
 MOLQJJEEREN. 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom, Amst. p. 88. 
 
 MONK'S. 
 
 The original mode of writing among the ancient Britons, 
 was by cutting letters with a knife upon sticks, either 
 squared or formed into three sides. This is a very ancient 
 alphabet made in that manner, and called Coelbren y Mynaif, 
 or alphabet of the Monks, and was communicated to me 
 by my ingenious friend W. Owen, F. A. S.
 
 206 
 
 NAGARI 1. 
 
 STSrr^fT^ 3 * 9 ? 
 a a i i u u ri ri 
 
 ^;^[^:%:%^r^3r: 
 
 Iri Iri e ai 6 ow am ah 
 
 ka 
 
 kha 
 
 g a 
 
 gha 
 
 nga 
 
 cha 
 
 chha 
 
 J a 
 
 jha 
 
 nya 
 
 - 
 
 2" 
 
 3" 
 
 ^ 
 
 ur 
 
 ta 
 
 tha 
 
 da 
 
 dha 
 
 na 
 
 5T 
 
 2T 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^T 
 
 ^ 
 
 ta 
 
 tha 
 
 da 
 
 dha 
 
 na 
 
 pa 
 
 pha 
 
 ba 
 
 bha 
 
 ma 
 
 ya 
 
 ra 
 
 la 
 
 va 
 
 
 XT 
 
 ^T 
 
 *F 
 
 ^ 
 
 ST 
 
 sa 
 
 sha 
 
 sa 
 
 ha 
 
 ksha 
 
 NAGARI 2. 
 
 Pater noster qui es in ccelis 
 
 ^l^St|2 ^ttj-3. ^aa i^5 
 
 sanftificetur nomen tuum regnum 
 
 ?"3R 31^ ^1^ ^I^^R ?\ 
 
 tuum adveniat fiat voluntas tua
 
 207 
 NAGARI 1. 
 
 Several of the provinces of India have alphabets distinS 
 from each other, in which they not only write their parti- 
 cular dialefts, but even the Sanskrits. Indeed most of 
 the alphabets, properly Indian, agree in the number, or- 
 der, and power of their letters, with this character, which 
 is properly called Devanagari, in which the Sanskrit a lan- 
 guage is most commonly written, and which is the most 
 elegant and approved. 
 
 All languages of the Hindu class are read from left to 
 right. 
 
 Learners are taught to repeat the Dtvanagari alphabet 
 according to the annexed very admirable arrangement, 
 which was obligingly communicated to me by my learned 
 friend Charles Wilkins, Esq. F. R. S. 
 
 Read a, a; /, // , u; &c. ka, kha; ga t gka; 8cc. 
 
 NAGARI 2. 
 
 The Pater Noster in this character, taken from the E- 
 eyc. Franc, pi. 17.
 
 208 
 
 NORMAN 1. 
 
 B 7 <A 6 T 3 H 
 
 b c d e f g h 
 
 I la 10 I/ Lt I& IT 
 
 i klmnopq 
 
 BTTT fiJfl V" U"^-, VQ Y*J "V A 
 all J.V/H Jx_ IVfl J\P J\X JWu 
 
 r stuwxyz 
 
 NORMAN 2. 
 
 bcdefgh 
 
 i klmnopq 
 
 i *& x ^,/fi ^/ r t 
 
 r stuxyz& 
 ANGLO NORMAN.
 
 209 
 NORMAN 1. 
 
 The Normans, Northmans, or people from the north, 
 emigrated from Denmark, Sweden, Norway, &c. and 
 spread themselves over Gaul, but particularly Neustria, 
 which name they soon changed to Normandy ; and during 
 the ravages they were making upon the coast, and other 
 parts, before they could settle themselves, to cover their 
 deliberations and councils, they invented a new alphabet, 
 (according to Bede) in which were only ten principal cha- 
 rafters, much like Greek ; the other fourteen were formed 
 by uniting those to others, as in the annexed specimen. 
 
 Duret, p. 866. 
 
 NORMAN 2. 
 
 This alphabet is also given on the authority of the vene- 
 rable Bede. 
 
 Duret, p. 866. 
 
 ANGLO-NORMAN. 
 
 Called by Astle modern Gothic ; by the French Let- 
 tres Tourneures; they were much used in adorning and il- 
 luminating Roman missals, from one of which the an- 
 nexed specimen was taken.
 
 210 
 
 NOOTKA SOUND. 
 
 A man Tanass A canoe Shapats 
 
 The sun Opulszthl A song Oonook 
 
 The moon Opulszthl A paddle Oowhabbe 
 
 A mount Noohchai Fire Eeneek 
 
 A house Mahtai Yes Ai, aio 
 
 Water Cfow No Wook, wik 
 
 Food Haoome The wind Okumha 
 
 A bow Moostatte A comb Suchkas 
 
 An arrow Tseehatte The hair Apsoop 
 
 To kill Seehsheetl The head Oooomitz 
 
 The teeth Cheecheets The eye Kussee 
 
 The nose JVkfr The ear P^ 
 
 The cheek Aamiss The chin Eehthlux 
 
 The beard Apuxim The face Eslulszth 
 
 The lips EetkluxoofTlie arm Aapso 
 
 The nippleEneema The nails Chushchuh 
 
 A por poised z#Afo0j A knot Mitzsleo 
 
 A bracelet Klaklasm Give me Kaatl 
 
 NORWEGIAN. 
 
 Wor fader du som est y himmelen, gehailiget 
 worde dit nafn ; tilkomma os riga dit, din wil- 
 ia geskia paa jorden, som handt er udi him- 
 melen: giffos y tag wort dagliga brouta; och 
 forlaet os wort skioldt, som wy forlata wora 
 skioldonar : och lad os icke komma voi fris- 
 telse, man frals os fra onet; thy rigit er dit, 
 macht, och kracht fra evighait til evighait.
 
 211 
 
 NOOTKA SOUND. 
 
 Taken from the vo'cabulary of this language, collefted 
 and formed by the late Capt. Cook. 
 
 Cook's Voy. v. 3. p. 542. 
 
 NORWEGIAN. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 48.
 
 212 
 
 NORTON SOUND. 
 
 Hair 
 
 Eyes 
 
 Cheek 
 
 Lips 
 
 Chin 
 
 Hand 
 
 Thigh 
 
 Foot 
 
 Sea 
 
 Canoe 
 
 Iron 
 
 Yes 
 
 Two 
 
 Four 
 
 Nooit Eye-brows 
 Enga Nose 
 Oollooak Ear 
 
 Kameluk 
 Ngha 
 Shudeka 
 
 Hashlaw Beard 
 Ganluk Arm 
 
 Oongai 
 Dallek 
 
 Aishet , Nails 
 
 Shetooe 
 
 Kokdoshac Leg 
 Etscheak Sun 
 Emai Water 
 
 Kanaiak 
 Maje 
 Mooe 
 
 Caiac Paddle 
 Shawik No 
 
 Pangehon 
 Ena 
 
 Eh One 
 
 Aiba Three 
 Shetamik Five 
 
 Adowjak 
 Pingashook 
 Dallamik 
 
 NOVA ZEMBLA. 
 
 Otcse naz icse ti nanabezi, Pozuetytze ime 
 tye, Pridi czarztvo tye, Budi uola tya kako 
 unebezi tako nazemli, Hlyb naz zakdan dy- 
 nam danacz, J odpuzi nam duge naze kako 
 imi odpuzymo doznikam nazim, Jnauedi naz 
 unapazet, Da izftaui naz od zla. Amen
 
 213 
 NORTON SOUND. 
 
 Taken from the table, to shew the affinity between the 
 languages spoken at OONALASHKA and NORTON SOUND, 
 and those of the GREEN LANDERS and ESQUIMAUX. 
 
 Cook's Voy. v. 3. p. 554. 
 
 NOVA ZEMBLA. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Oral. Dom. Amst. p. 80*.
 
 214 
 
 OTAHEITE. 
 
 Father 
 
 Mituatane Mother 
 
 Mituaheine 
 
 The skin 
 The veins 
 
 Ewey 
 Ewaowa 
 
 Blood 
 The hair 
 
 Matee 
 Eraowroo 
 
 The lips 
 A rat 
 A seal 
 
 Eooto 
 Eyoare 
 Ehoome 
 
 The teeth 
 A bird 
 A louse 
 
 Eneeho 
 Manoo 
 Oatoo 
 
 Sea-weed 
 
 E reemo 
 
 Bread-fruit Ooroo 
 
 Wood 
 
 Etoomoo 
 
 A stone 
 
 Owhai 
 
 Fire 
 Water 
 Clouds 
 
 Wahaa 
 Avy 
 Eata 
 
 Light 
 Wind 
 Smoke 
 
 Eahei 
 Matai 
 Eohoo 
 
 The sun 
 
 Manaha 
 
 The moon 
 
 Marama 
 
 A ship 
 
 Pace 
 
 A bonnet 
 
 Aihoo 
 
 OONALASHKA. 
 
 The hair 
 The eye 
 The cheek 
 The teeth 
 The neck 
 A finger 
 A thigh 
 The foot 
 The sky 
 The wind 
 Fire 
 A knife 
 
 Emelack 
 
 Dhac 
 
 Qoloodk 
 
 Agaloo 
 
 Ooioc 
 
 Atooch 
 
 Cachemac A leg 
 
 Ooleac The sun 
 
 Enanac A cloud 
 
 Caitchee The sea 
 
 Keiganach Wood 
 
 Kamclac A house 
 
 Eye brow Kamlik 
 The nose Anoschc 
 The lip Adhee 
 The chin Ismalock 
 The breast Shimsen 
 The nails Cagelch 
 Ketac 
 Agadac 
 Aiengick 
 Alaoock 
 Hearach 
 Oolac
 
 215 
 OTAHEITE. 
 
 Taken from the vocabulary of the language. 
 
 Park. Voy. p. 51. 
 
 OONALASHKA. 
 
 This specimen is taken from the table of affinity between 
 the languages spoken at OONALASHKA and NORTON 
 SOUND, and those of the GREENLANDERS and ESQUI- 
 MAUX. 
 
 Cook's Voy. vol. 3. p. 554.
 
 216 
 
 ORCADIAN. 
 
 Favor i iri chimrie, helleur ir i nam thite, gil- 
 la cosdum thite cumma, veya thine mota vara 
 gort o yurn sinna gort i chimrie, ga vus da on 
 dalight brow vora, firgive vus sinna vora sin 
 vee firgive sindara mutha vus, lyv us & ye i 
 tuntation, min delivera vus fro oh ilt. Amen. 
 
 PALMYRAN. 
 
 y* F ? X X <-( 3 X 
 
 hhz v hd gb a 
 vJViQhfA-t^A/r 
 
 S \J %J*J *~s *~J \J 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 u* v" TL J* i>-^ 3 
 
 t sh r q ts p 
 
 . A 
 
 POLISH. 
 
 Oicze nass, ktorys jest w niebiesiech. Swiec- 
 sie imic twoie. Przydz krolestvo twoie. Badz 
 wola twa, jako wniebie, taky na ziemi. Chle- 
 ba nass ego powessedniego day nam dzisia. Y 
 od pusc nam nasze winy, ja koymy od pusec 
 zamo nassym winowajcom. Ynie w wodz nas 
 na pokusseme. Ale nas zbaw ode zkego. A- 
 bowiem twoje jest krolestwo, y moc, y chwa- 
 ta, na wieki. Amen.
 
 217 
 ORCADIAN, 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 6,5. 
 
 PALMVRAN* 
 
 This alphabet, which has great affinity to the Hebrew, 
 and is written from right to left, was first decyphered by 
 the late celebrated Abbe Barthelemi. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. V. 
 
 POLISH* 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, from a bible in this language, Dantz. 
 
 1632* 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 58.
 
 218 
 
 A man 
 A child 
 A father 
 A wife 
 A friend 
 The teeth 
 The body 
 Bones 
 A knife 
 A bason 
 Plantains 
 Fire 
 Smoke 
 
 PELEW ISLANDS. 
 
 Arracat A woman 
 Nalakell A chief 
 Cattam A mother 
 MorwakellA boy 
 Sucalie The head 
 Ungelell The arms 
 Kalakalat The blood 
 Oroosock A spoon 
 Oyless A cup 
 
 Quail 
 Too 
 Karr 
 Katt 
 
 Yams 
 A torch 
 A town 
 A rat 
 
 Artheil 
 
 Rupack 
 
 Catheil 
 
 Talacoy 
 
 Botheluth 
 
 Kimath 
 
 Arrassack 
 
 Trir 
 
 Peioell 
 
 Cocow 
 
 Outh 
 
 Morabalon 
 
 Pyaap 
 
 PERSIAN 1. 
 
 kheh feh reh teh scheh deh oueh ueh 
 
 meh schieh leh hemeh zeh deh yeh kha 
 
 queh ah i hoiieh i teheh oun en 
 
 J > & 3 S*O O 
 
 deh ho teh enkeh sch kieh hheh gheh 
 
 03 CL 1 UV Z ^ 99 
 
 gieh dgeh neh hayeh gnieh pa seh eh
 
 219 
 PELEW ISLANDS. 
 
 This vocabulary of the language is taken from 
 
 Guthrie, p. 164. 
 
 PERSIAN 1. 
 
 This is the alphabet of the Gaures, or ancient Persians, 
 who were worshipers of fire. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XV.
 
 220 
 
 PERSIAN 2. 
 
 jf Jj 
 
 ^CjcSj (1 
 
 U ^,0*** 
 V 
 
 oCCu 
 
 x 'x O x > 
 
 1AJ ( 
 
 x OJ O x > U X 
 
 > & 
 
 j u &ju. u 
 
 xx xO-> O 
 
 (- 'If U < ~> 
 
 PERSIAN 3. 
 
 Ei padere ma kih der osmon. Pak basched 
 nam tou. Beyayed padschahi tou. Schwad 
 chwaste tou herazjunankih der osmon niz der 
 zemin. Bideh mara jmrouz nan kefaf rouz 
 mara. Wudargudshar mara konahan ma zju- 
 nankih ma niz migudhsarim orman mara. 
 Wudar ozmajisch minedaz mara. Likin cha- 
 lasd kun mara ez scherire. Beraj ankih mel- 
 cut wunirumendi w'a-tsemet ez on toust vuta 
 ebed ebedi 'lebedi. Amin.
 
 221 
 PERSIAN 2. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, from Wheloc's four Evangelists in 
 
 this charafter. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 17. 
 
 PERSIAN 3. 
 
 The literal reading of the above. 
 
 Wilk Ess. p. 435. 
 Orat. Dora. p. 17.
 
 222 
 
 PERSIAN 4. 
 
 Ei padere ma kih der osmoni. Pak basched 
 nam tu. Beyayed padschahi tu. Schwad ch- 
 waste tu hemzjunankih der osmon niz der 
 zemin. Bdeh mara jmrouz nan kefaf rouz 
 mara. Wadargudsar mara konahan ma zju- 
 nankih ma niz migsarim orman mara. Wo- 
 dar ozmajisch minedaz mara. Likin chalas 
 kun mara ez scherir. Beraj ankih melcut wa- 
 nirumendi w'a-semet ez on tust ecnoun wota 
 ebed ebed 'i lebedi. Amin. 
 
 PERSIAN 5. 
 
 Namoz Hasrath Issa. Ei peder moh ki der a- 
 osmoni. Nahm ssetthuda kiarda sheued pa- 
 deschahi tu biagad. Araadeh tu bedgia awer- 
 dah sheved derssamin ki dziun der osmon. 
 Nam hererouss imerouss baemo baersan. Ve 
 giunoh moh meof kiunid csenancsi moh. Us- 
 chanera ki bemoh giunoh kerda end aafu fer- 
 matim ve derweswesse. Sheittan mahrah mef- 
 kiun amma essu mahrah chellos kiunid ki 
 paddeschai tu. Ve dgelalettu ve kuddret tu 
 giawid baschad. Amin.
 
 223 
 PERSIAN 4. 
 
 The literal reading of the Lord's Prayer in the vulgar 
 dialea. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Arast. p. 9. 
 
 PERSIAN 5. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer in the Jaghuthian dialeft. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 10.
 
 224 
 
 PERSIAN 6. 
 
 PERSIAN 7. 
 
 tcha gjia gha pa ba a a a 
 
 ID J3 &3 Cj .Ip Ijj o3 N^X 
 
 tha cha zha za on va ha da 
 
 ^o } 6 $ ^ 9 j /C 
 
 sa na ma ta gha ca i ya 
 
 POCONCHI. 
 
 Catat taxah vilcat ; mmta incaharcihi avi ; in- 
 chalita avihauripan cana. Invanivita nava ya- 
 hvir vacacal, he in vantaxah. Chaye runa ca-> 
 huhunta quih viic. Nacachtamac, he incaca- 
 chve quimac ximacquivi chiqvih. Macoacana 
 chipam catacchyhi; coave9ata china unche 
 tsiri, mani quiro, he inpui. Amen.
 
 225 
 PERSIAN 6. 
 
 A verse taken from an ancient Persian manuscript in the 
 possession of Major Ouseley. 
 
 PERSIAN 7. 
 
 This alphabet, which is taken from Hyde's edition de 
 Religione veterum Persarum, is called Zend or Pazend, 
 and is supposed to have been used by Zoroastre. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. 16. 
 
 POCONCHI. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p, 435. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 63.
 
 226 
 
 PHENICIAN 1. 
 
 c8 <J c *n?j 
 
 abcdefgh 
 
 k 1 m n o p q 
 
 r s tvxyzz 
 PHENICIAN 2. 
 
 j> a ^ 2 4 n am 
 
 hhzvhdg ba 
 
 aa s n in 1 k s th 
 
 fl WQ Y JW) ^ 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 PHENICIAN 3. 
 
 k i hh v h d b a 
 
 r q ts aa s n m 
 
 AY 
 
 t sh
 
 227 
 PHEKICIAN. 
 
 Chronologers and historians (see Jackson's Chronolo- 
 gical Antiquities, Vol. III.) render it sufficiently probable, 
 that the Phenicians had alphabetical characters as early as 
 any people in the world : and tho' no writings in that lan- 
 guage have descended to our time, we are, by no means, 
 destitute of sufficient authority for the number and form of 
 their letters. The ancient Greeks called the Phenicians 
 PELASGI quasi PELAGII, or wanderers, from Pelagus, the 
 sea; and, as we have already observed, the Pelasgian 
 Greeks, as well as the Thebans and Italians, undoubtedly 
 received their letters from the Phenicians. 
 
 It is beyond the limits of this work to give authorities 
 for every individual letter, but I trust my readers will be 
 satisfied with those subjoined. 
 
 PHENICIAN 1. 
 
 This character has been falsely called Syriac, but it is 
 more properly Phenician, or Ionic, being written from 
 left to right, and having nothing in it's form in common 
 with those letters which compose the Syriac alphabets. 
 
 Duret, p. 366. 
 
 PHENICIAN 2. 
 
 This character, which is attributed to Scaliger, is given 
 by Spanheim, p. 80, also in Montf. Pal. Graec. p. 122. 
 
 PHENICIAN 3. 
 
 This alphabet is handed to us on the authority of the late 
 Abbe Barthelemy, who is said to have taken it from in- 
 scriptions preserved in Malta, and from Syrian medals. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. V.
 
 228 
 
 PHENICIAN 4. 
 
 7 y Vi , 
 
 n mhhh hd b a 
 
 P \L> ^ ^ ^ 
 
 t sh r q aa 
 
 PHENICIAN 5. 
 
 i 3 * 
 
 hhzvhdgba 
 
 ts aa s n m 1 k i 
 
 Av_ty q 
 
 t sh r 
 
 PHENICIAN 6. 
 
 f o 
 
 ihhv hdg b a 
 
 sh r q aa n m 1 k 
 
 A 
 
 t
 
 229 
 
 PHENICIAN 4. 
 
 This character, which is also given on the same autho- 
 rity as the preceding, is taken from Sicilian coins. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. V. 
 
 PHENICIAN 5. 
 
 This Phenician alphabet is taken from inscriptions pre- 
 erved in cyphers, and is mentioned by Pocock. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. V. 
 
 PHENICIAN 6. 
 
 This alphabet, which is given on the authority of the 
 three preceding, is taken from an inscription lately disco- 
 vered in Malta. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. V.
 
 230 
 
 PHENICIAN 7. 
 
 4 A 
 
 9 9 <>y 9 4 4 b 
 
 A^A 1 1 g 
 c\ q 4^ 4^ Ta 
 Je 
 
 ovoOOOo 
 
 PT 7k 
 S\H H<\ S r 
 
 VU/U) COW S
 
 231 
 
 PHENICIAN 7. 
 
 Great doubts being entertained of the correctness of the 
 preceding Phenician characters, particularly the two first, 
 I have been favored by my learned friend and antiquary, 
 the Rev. S. Henley, with the annexed alphabetic arrange- 
 ment, verified from coins and inscriptions by himself, ex- 
 cept the C ) for oins, and the same for pe, which were 
 adopted on the authorities of Dutens and Bayer.
 
 232 
 
 PORT DES FRANCAIS. 
 
 One 
 
 Two 
 
 Three 
 
 Four 
 
 Five 
 
 Six 
 
 Seven 
 
 Eight 
 
 Nine 
 
 Ten 
 
 Eleven 
 
 Twenty 
 
 Thirty 
 
 Forty 
 
 Fifty 
 
 Sixty 
 
 Seventy 
 
 Eighty 
 
 Ninety 
 
 A hundred 
 
 Keirrk 
 
 Theirh 
 
 Neisk 
 
 Taakhoun 
 
 Keitschinc 
 
 Kleitouchou 
 
 Takatouchou 
 
 Netskatouchou 
 
 Kouehok 
 
 Tchinecate 
 
 Keirkrha-keirrk 
 
 Theirha 
 
 Neiskrha 
 
 Taakhounrha 
 
 Keitschinerha 
 
 Kleitouchourha 
 
 Tatatouchourha 
 
 Netskatouchourha 
 
 Kouehokrha 
 
 Tchinecaterha
 
 233 
 PORT DBS FRANCAIS. 
 
 Vocabulary of numeration of Port des Francais. 
 
 Perouse, Vol. 2. p. 152.
 
 234 
 
 PHILOSOPHIC 1. 
 
 ^ /9 1 ** ! | w ^A 8 
 
 Our father who art in heaven, thy name be 
 
 hallowed, thy kingdom come, thy will be done 
 
 L 4\ /' 4-/VV" ; 
 
 so in earth, as in heaven, give to us on this 
 
 day our bread expedient, and forgive us our 
 (\_yyj* o an/ * v <VA-P 
 
 trespasses, as we forgive them who trespass a- 
 < " v "W Uifc < 
 gainst us, and lead us not into temptation but 
 
 deliver us from evil, for the kingdom and the 
 
 Vn v 7 W- ;* ^ 
 
 power, and the glory is thine, for ever and e- 
 
 L. 
 
 ver. Amen. So be it.
 
 235 
 PHILOSOPHIC I. 
 
 The annexed is an attempt of the late learned Bishop 
 Wilkins towards a real characler, and philosophical lan- 
 guage ; but he expresses himself sensible, that this contri- 
 vance is not brought to that degree of perfection to which 
 it might have been upon further consideration and praftice. 
 For the information of my curious readers, I refer him 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 421.
 
 236 
 
 . PHILOSOPHIC 2. 
 
 HOLI coba /a ril dad, ha bfltb/ /o s#ymt0t, ha 
 salba 10 velcst, ha totlbi /o vemg, m ril dady 
 me r/1 dad /o velp/ rod i ril / poto \\OLt sfcba va- 
 ty, na /o sseldiss lal a/ hot/ botlgas me oil /a s- 
 eldys \OL\ ei /a valgas r ct/, na m/ /o velco 
 a/, rod bedodl nil 10 csalbo au lal votgas/e, nor 
 al salba, na od tado, na al tadala /o ha pisbya 
 m /o. Amen. 
 
 PHILOSOPHIC 3. 
 
 Yr fadher hitsh art in heven : Halloed bi 
 dhyi nam. Dhyi cingdym cym. Dhyi &il bi 
 dyn in erth az it is in heven. Giv ys dhis da/ 
 yr da/1/ bred: and fargiv ys yr trespassez, 
 az / fargiv dhem dhat trespass against ys. 
 And led ys nat int temptasian, byt deliver 
 ys fram ivil. Amen. 
 
 PHILOSOPHIC 4. 
 
 o cx a e i u y h 
 
 6 aw a e ee oo u huh 
 
 gi ki sh ng n r t d 1 
 
 zfrTifvbpm 
 
 s ez th dh f ev b p m
 
 237 
 PHILOSOPHIC 2. 
 
 Another curious attempt of Dr. Wilkins, which he has 
 fully explained in his essays, p. 421, &c. 
 
 PHILOSOPHIC 3. 
 
 This is also another example of the Doctor's ingenuity, 
 for which see his essays, p. 435. 
 
 PHILOSOPHIC 4. 
 
 In a very curious letter from the late Dr. Franklin, in 
 answer to Miss S****, written in this chara&er, according 
 to the usual mode of spelling and pronunciation, the reader 
 will find the Doctor's arguments for, and recommendation 
 of, his reformed mode of spelling. See Dr. F's. Political, 
 Miscellaneous, and Political Pieces, 8vo. Lond. 1779. p. 
 473. 
 
 The alphabet is copied in the order and manner given by 
 the author, p. 470.
 
 238 
 
 PORTUGUESE 1. 
 
 Padre nosso, questas nos ceos, sanftificado seia 
 otu nome; venha a nos o teu reino, sea feita 
 a tua voluntade, assi nos ceos, come na terra. 
 Opao nosson de cadadia, da nolo oie nestro 
 dia, e perdoa a nos sennor as nossas dividas, 
 assi como nos perdoamos aos nossos dividores 
 e naon nos dexes cahir in tentacaon, mas li- 
 bra nos do mal. Amen. 
 
 PORTUGUESE 2. 
 
 Pae nosso que estas n'os ceos, sanftificado se- 
 ga o teu nome, venna o teu reyno, seja feita 
 a tua vontade assi n'a terra como n'o ceo; O 
 pao nosso de cadadia nos da hoje, e perdoa- 
 nos nossas dividas, assi como nos perdoamos 
 nossos devedores ; e nao nos metas emtas ten- 
 tacao, mas livra nos de mal. Porque teu he o 
 
 PORTUGUESE 3. 
 
 Nosso pay que estas n'o c'eo, santificado seia 
 teu nome, venha teu reyno, tua vontade se fa- 
 9a na terra, como n'o ceo ; da nos oje nosso 
 pao quotidiano, et perdoanos nossos trespas- 
 ses assi como nos perdoamos a os que trespas- 
 sao contra nos ; et nao nos tragas a tentacao, 
 mas livra nos do mal : porque teu he o reyno,
 
 239 
 PORTUGUESE. 
 
 This language does not differ materially from that of 
 Spain, but the pronunciation is harsher. 
 
 It is spoken on all the coasts of Africa and Asia, as far 
 as China, but mixed with the languages of the several na- 
 tions in those distant regions. 
 
 Guthrie, p. 8J 3. 
 
 PORTUGUESE 1, 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, as used about 200 years ago. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 38. 
 
 PORTUGUESE 2 and 3. 
 
 These two readings of the Lord's Prayer are given in 
 David Wilkins's edition of Chamberlayne's Orat. Dom. 
 p. 46.
 
 240 
 
 PORTUGUESE 4. 
 
 Padre nosso que estais nos ceos, santificado 
 seja o vosso nome, venha a nos o vosso rey- 
 no: seja feita a vossa vontade assim na terra, 
 como no 960, o pao nosso de cada dia nos dai 
 hoje; perdoai as nossas devidas assim como 
 nos perdoamos a os nossos devidores, e nao 
 nos deixeis cahir em tentaao, mas livrai-nos 
 de tudo o mal. Amen. 
 
 PRINCE WILLIAM'S SOUND. 
 
 Akashou 
 
 Namuk 
 
 Lukluk 
 
 Aa 
 
 Natooneshuk 
 
 Keeta 
 
 Naema 
 
 Ooonaka 
 
 Ahleu 
 
 Weena Veena 
 
 Keelashuk 
 
 Tawuk 
 
 Whaehai 
 
 Chilke 
 
 Taiha 
 
 Tokke 
 
 Chukelo 
 
 One 
 
 Two 
 
 Three 
 
 Four 
 
 What's the name of it 
 
 An ear ornament 
 
 A brown shaggy skin 
 
 Yes 
 
 The sea-otter's skin 
 
 Give me something 
 
 Exchange with me 
 
 Belonging to me 
 
 A spear 
 
 Stranger! 
 
 Guts 
 
 Keep it 
 
 Shall I keep it? 
 
 Koeheene Five 
 
 Takulai Six 
 
 Keichilho Seven 
 
 Kliew Eight
 
 241 
 PORTUGUESE 4. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer in the modern tongue, with which I 
 was favoured by a gentleman well acquainted with the lan- 
 guage. 
 
 PRINCE WILLIAM'S SOUND. 
 
 A specimen taken from a vocabulary of the language in 
 Cook's last voyage, Vol. 2. p. 375.
 
 242 
 
 PRUSSIAN 1. 
 
 Thawe nuson kas thu asse andangon, swintin 
 wirst tais Emmens, pergcis twais laeims, twais 
 quaits audasseisin nasemmey key andangon, 
 nusan deininan ge'ittin dais numons schindei- 
 nan, bha attwerpeis noumans nuson anschau- 
 tins, kay mas atwerpimay nuson anschautni- 
 kamans, bhany wedais mans enperbandan, 
 sclait is rankeis mans assa wargan. Amen. 
 
 PRUSSIAN 2. 
 
 Thawe nouson kas thou aesse endengon. Swy- 
 tits wirse twais emmens. Parey sey noumans 
 twayia ryeky. Tways quaits audaseysin na se- 
 miey kay endengon. Nouson deyninan geyti- 
 ey days noumans schindeynan. Bhae etwerpeis 
 noumans nouson anschautins, kay mes etwer- 
 pymay nouson anschautinekamans. Emmen. 
 
 PRUSSIAN 3. 
 
 Nossen thewes cur tu es delbes. Sehwiz ges- 
 ger thowes wardes. Penag mynys thowe myst- 
 lalstibe. Toppes pratres gircad delbeszisne ta- 
 de tymnes sennes worsinny. Dodi nomimes an 
 nosse igdenas magse. Unde geitkas pamas nu- 
 mas musse nozegun cademas pametam nusson 
 pyrtainekans. No wede numus padam pado- 
 mam, swalbadi mumes newuse. Jesus Amen.
 
 243 
 PRUSSIAN 1. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, from Chr. Hartknoch. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 8,5. 
 
 PRUSSIAN 2. 
 
 This reading of the Lord's Prayer is also given on the 
 authority of the same author. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 86. 
 
 PRUSSIAN 3. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, on the authority of Simon Grono- 
 
 vius. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 86.
 
 244 
 
 ROMAN, 
 
 ABCDEFGHIJKLM 
 NOPQRSTUWXYZ 
 
 abcdefghijklmn 
 opqrfstuvwxyz& 
 
 RUNIC 1. 
 
 B F 4X> f Y Y 
 
 bcdefg 
 
 iklmnopq 
 
 B TI t Ii F Wi Jl 
 
 r s t v x y z 
 
 RUNIC 2. 
 
 Fader uor som est i himlum, halgad warde 
 thitt nama. Tilkomme thitt rikie. Skie thin 
 vilie, so som i himmalan, so och po jordanne. 
 Wort dachlicha brodh gif os i dagh. Ogh for- 
 lat os uora skuldar, so som ogh vi forlate the 
 as skyldighe are. Ogh inled os ikkie i frestol- 
 san, utan frels os ifra ondo. Ty rikiad ar thitt 
 ogh maghtan, ogh harligheten. Amen.
 
 245 
 ROMAN. 
 
 The capital alphabet which is now generally adopted and 
 used throughout Europe, is said to have been derived from 
 the Attic and Ionic Greek and Latin, the latter of which 
 is given in No. 2. page 172 of this work. The lower 
 case, or small letters, seem to have been formed from other 
 Latins, Lombard, and Saxon characters. 
 
 The annexed alphabets are the Two-Line English of the 
 Type-Street Foundery. 
 
 RUNIC 1. 
 
 Several nations of the North used this character, which 
 is derived from the Maeso-Gothic. The annexed alphabet 
 
 is copied from 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. X. 
 
 RUNIC 2. 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 22.
 
 246 
 
 RUSSIAN 1. 
 
 Aa Be BB Tr 44 Ee ]Kx Ss 
 
 abvgde j z 
 
 3s HH li KK AA MM HH Oo 
 
 z i i k 1 m no 
 
 Iln PP Cc mm 7y $<*> Xx Ife 
 
 p r s t u ph ch tz 
 
 Hi niiu LUnj tt Lin Lb fcs 9s 
 
 ch sch schtsch yerr yeri yer yat e 
 
 K>K> Ha YY 
 
 yu ya th ischitza 
 RUSSIAN 2. 
 
 Onrae Haurb, Hace CCH na ne- 
 Eecxi, /ca CBHmHniCH HMJI 
 mBoe, ^a npin/cemi) ijapcin- 
 Bie mBoe, Aa By4emi> BOAH 
 HIBOJI, HKO na HCECCH H Ha 
 36MAH. XA-BBTD Haint nacynj- 
 HM'H Aaac/c^ naML 4Heci>. H 
 ocmaBH HaMi. AOAFH nama, 
 H MH ocmaBAHeMt 
 
 HainHMt. H HH 
 
 BBC/CH Haci> BO HCKyinenie, 
 HO H3BaBH omi) AyxaBaro. 
 mBoe ecmt ijapcmBO H
 
 247 
 RUSSIAN 1. 
 
 The annexed characters were cut at the Letter- Foundery 
 in Type-Street, from alphabets in the Vocabularia totiut 
 erbis Linguarum comparativa, collected and published by 
 command of the late Empress of Russia, in 2 vols. 4to. 
 
 RUSSIAN 2. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, as used at the present day in the 
 public service of the church in Russia.
 
 248 
 
 RUSSIAN 3. 
 
 Otshe nash ije esi na nebesech. Da svetitsia i- 
 mia tvoie. Da pridet tzarstvie tvoie. Da bud- 
 et volia tvoia iako nanebesi i na zemli. Chleb 
 nash nasuschnii dajid nam dnies. J ostavinam 
 dolgi nasha jakoje i mi ostavliaem doljinicom 
 nashim. J ne vovedi nas vo iscuschenie. No 
 izbavi nas ot lucavago. Amen. 
 
 SAMARITAN 1.' 
 
 & V 
 
 hhzvhdgb 
 
 & & > ^ ^> 3 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 SAMARITAN 2. 
 
 hhzvhdgba 
 
 D 3 3Hf^;iM^ 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 ^ WT P *n zi 
 
 t sch r q ts p
 
 249 
 RUSSIAN 3. 
 
 The literal reading of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 78. 
 
 SAMARITAN 1. 
 
 The authors who have engaged in the dispute respecting 
 the priority of the Hebrew and Samaritan alphabets, have 
 been mentioned under the former article, (which see.) It 
 is scarcely possible at this time to determine, whether al- 
 phabets were first used in Chaldea or Phenicia ; but there 
 can be little doubt, that the latter furnished letters to a far 
 greater number of languages than the former. There is 
 reason to believe that the Samaritan continued a living lan- 
 guage for many centuries. 
 
 Fournier calls this Idumean, and says it was used by 
 many nations in Asia, Vol. 2. p. 279. Duret says it was 
 brought from the Levant, p. 324. 
 
 SAMARITAN 2. 
 
 This character is said to have been delineated after the 
 course and movements of nature, Duret, p. 323.
 
 250 
 
 SAMARITAN 3. 
 
 ^ * a 4 3 4 
 
 hhz vhd g b 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 SAMARITAN 4. 
 
 hhvvh dgba 
 
 n n m m 1 1 
 
 hh 
 
 t sch r q ts aa 
 
 SAMARITAN 5. 
 
 hhz ve dgb a 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 t sch r q ts p
 
 251 
 SAMARITAN 3. 
 
 This character is also said, by Theseus Ambrosius, to 
 have been formed from the same as the preceding ; it was 
 approved and received into use at Rome, and called an- 
 cient Greek. 
 
 Duret, p. 324. 
 
 LeClabart,p.517. 
 
 SAMARITAN 4. 
 
 This curious alphabet was taken from Samaritan coins 
 
 by Walton. 
 
 Spanh. Dissert, p. 80. 
 
 SAMARITAN 5. 
 
 This alphabet is copied from 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. I.
 
 252 
 
 SAMARITAN 6. 
 
 hh z vhd gb a 
 
 7 ^^7 ^7 > 2f m ^ 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 AS^^^V!^ 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 SAMARITAN 7. 
 
 ZA-? : 
 
 isZ rrra : ^*\a ^^Z-m^j ISA- /rra : 
 
 SARACEN 1, 
 
 MB 1 X 
 
 abcdefgh 
 
 i k 1 m n o p q 
 
 H VI tf A, i;t X 3 
 
 s t tsi v x y z
 
 253 
 SAMARITAN 6. 
 
 The modern Samaritan alphabet, copied by the late Dr. 
 Morton, from a manuscript in the Cottonian library n 
 the British Museum, and was by him esteemed the most 
 correct of any ex ant. 
 
 Dr. Morton's Table. 
 
 SAMARITAN 7 f 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, the literal reading of which is the 
 as the Hebrew. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 10. 
 
 SARACEN 1. 
 
 This character, according to Theseus Ambrosius, was 
 used by the Saracens at the time of their conquests. 
 
 Duret, p. 475.
 
 254 
 
 SARACEN 2. 
 
 o n m 1 k i 
 
 $ IK ^ JVIN L G K 
 
 h gfedcba 
 
 15 *= Ii 
 
 q p 
 
 X i 
 
 z y x v t s r 
 
 SARACEN 3. 
 
 reh he ez tech te b a ayn 
 
 & &<& ttfGwft^ & > 
 
 dgh ta cda sad sch za nun dal 
 
 C J * 3* ^* S 0> 
 
 mym la lam caph khab fl la vua 
 SARACEN 4. 
 
 ^ j 9 v i i. 1 t 
 
 hhzvhdg b a 
 
 vuiJ ^J fi Jh 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 i' JL ,j 4 ^P q 
 
 t sh r q ts p
 
 255 
 SARACEN 2. 
 
 This alphabet is handed to us on the authority of John 
 Baptist Palatin, a Roman citizen, in a learned treatise, 
 
 teaching to write in all languages and letters, both an- 
 " cient and modern. 
 
 Duret, p. 475. 
 
 SARACEN 3. 
 
 Duret gives this alphabet as a Saracen, which seems to 
 have some affinity to the Arabic. See this author, " De 
 
 la comparaison du scavoir Arabesque et Sarrasinesque, 
 " avec 1'Egyptien, Chaldaique, &c." p. 477. 
 
 SARACEN 4. 
 
 On the authority of Kircher this alphabet is given in 
 
 Dr. Morton's Table.
 
 256 
 
 SARACEN 5. 
 
 SARDINIAN 1. 
 
 Pare nostru, qui istas in sos quelos, siat sanc- 
 tificadu su nomen teu : vengat a nois su reg- 
 nu teu. Fasase sa voluntat tua, axi comen su 
 quelu, gasi en la terra. Lo pa nostru de dog- 
 nia die da nos hoc, I dexia a nos altres sos de- 
 pitos nostros, comente nos ateros dexiam als 
 deppitores nostros. Ino nos induescas in sa 
 tentatio : mas livra nos de male. Amen. 
 
 SARDINIAN 2. 
 
 Babbu nostru, sughale ses in sos chelus : san- 
 tufiada su nomine tuo : bengiad su rennu tuo : 
 faciad si sa voluntade tua, comenti en chelo, 
 gasi in sa terra. Su pane nostru de ogniedie 
 da nos lu hoae, et lassa a nosateros is deppidos 
 nostrus, gasi comente e nosateros lassaos a sos 
 deppidores nostrus. E non nos portis in sa 
 tentassione. Impero libera nos da male. Amen.
 
 257 
 SARACEN 5. 
 
 Inscription upon a bridge near the pyramids of Mem- 
 phis. 
 
 Norden's Antiquities, Vol. 1. pi. 44. 
 
 SARDINIAN 1 and 2. 
 
 The Sardinians had formerly a language proper to them- 
 selves, but having past by conquests, under different go- 
 vernments, it has been considerably altered and corrupted ; 
 nevertheless it has retained many words not in any other 
 tongue. 
 
 There are two principal languages spoken in this island ; 
 one of which is used in the cities and towns, and has a 
 good deal of the Latin and Spanish in it, and is the No. 1. 
 annexed. The other, which is the native tongue, is spoken 
 
 in the country. 
 
 Duret, p. 818.
 
 258 
 
 SAVANNA. 
 
 Keelah nosse kitshah awe heyring. Yah zong 
 seway ononteeo. Agow aygon awoanneeo. 
 Yes yaon onang che owah itsche heyring. Ka- 
 at shiack mowatgi hee kannaterow tyenteron. 
 Esh keinong cha haowi eto neeot shkeynong 
 ha'itshe kitsha haowi. Ga ri waah et kain. Is- 
 se he owain match! : Agow aigon isse sha wa- 
 neeo egawain ona'ing. Neeo. 
 
 SAVOO. 
 
 A man 
 
 Momonne 
 
 The head 
 
 Catoo 
 
 A woman 
 
 Mobunne 
 
 The hair 
 
 Row catoo 
 
 A boy 
 A horse 
 A hog 
 A goat 
 A sheep 
 A boat 
 
 Monecopai Temples 
 Dejaro The eyes 
 Vavee The ears 
 Kesavoo The nose 
 Doomba The chin 
 Cova One 
 
 Otaile 
 Madda 
 Wodeeloo 
 Sivanga 
 Pagavee 
 Isse, ussc 
 
 The sun 
 
 Lodo 
 
 Two 
 
 Rooe 
 
 The moon 
 
 Wurroo 
 
 Three 
 
 Tulloo 
 
 The sky 
 Smoke 
 
 Leeroo 
 Sabooai 
 
 Four 
 Five 
 
 Uppa 
 Lumee 
 
 Cold 
 Heat 
 
 Mireengee Six 
 Kibasoo Seven 
 
 Unna 
 Petoo 
 
 Fire 
 Water 
 
 Ace 
 Ailei 
 
 Eight 
 Nine 
 
 Aroo 
 Saio 
 
 The earth 
 
 Vorai 
 
 Ten 
 
 Singooroo
 
 259 
 SAVANNA. 
 
 This is the Lord's Prayer in the native language of Sa- 
 vanna in Georgia, in America. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 89. 
 
 SAVOO. 
 
 Taken from the vocabulary of the language of this 
 
 Island. 
 
 Parkinson's Voy. p. 163.
 
 260 
 
 SAXON 1. 
 
 ABCDe FliO 
 
 abcde fgh 
 
 ; K L 07 N P E 
 
 m n o cu 
 
 rs tdhuxy 
 SAXON 2. 
 
 Sa Bb Cc Db DS 6e Fj: 
 ph Ii Kk LI COm Nn Oo Pp 
 Rp 8j Tt Wp Xx Yy Z^ 
 
 SAXON 3. 
 
 Fabeji vjien ^u ajV& in ^eoj:naj*, j-ie ^ehal- 
 ^ub Noma ^m to cyme^ jiic ^m. j-ie jzillo 
 ^m piae ij* in ^eopne "3 in Gojifta. ^laj: uj:- 
 ejine opejipij-thc j*el uj- to baej, *3 For 1 ^ 6 ^ 
 u r r c J^ a uj^na J U3e P e fojijepon Scyljum 
 ujium. 2nb ne mleab uj-i^ in Coftnunge. 
 pjiom 6vil.
 
 261 
 SAXON 1. 
 
 The form of this letter, at the time of the Saxon inva- 
 sion, about the year 450, according to Gibson's chronicle, 
 seems to have been quite unknown ; but Dr. Johnson thinks 
 this people were so illiterate, as most probably to have been 
 without any alphabet. 
 
 The annexed, which is the most ancient Saxon charac- 
 ter, is taken from 
 
 Dr. Morton's Table. 
 
 SAXON 2. 
 
 The modern Saxon alphabet, cast at the Type-Street 
 Better Foundery. 
 
 SAXON 3. 
 
 What the Saxon tongue was, long before the conquest, 
 may be observed in the most ancient manuscript of that 
 language, being a gloss on the Evangelists, by Eadfride, 
 eighth bishop of Lindffarne, about A. D. 700, from which 
 the annexed is taken. 
 
 Camden's Remains, p. 23.
 
 262 
 
 SAXON 4. 
 
 Faebeji ujie Jm J?e eaji)? on heopenum, p Jnn 
 nama Irehalgob to be cume Jnn jiice ; ge- 
 pun]?e Jnn pilla on eojij?an j-pa j-pa on heope- 
 num, ujine je bae^hpanhcan hlaj: j-yle uj- to 
 Snb jzoj^yj: uj- ujie jyltaj-, j-pa j-pa pe 
 ujium jyltenbum. Snb ne jelaeb- 
 be J?u uj- on coj-tnunj. Sc Slyj-e uj- oj: yjzle. 
 
 SAXON 5. 
 
 Thu ujie fabeji J>e ea]*t on heofenum. 81 
 )?m nama jehaljob. Cum J?in jiic. 81 Jnn pil- 
 la on eo_pj>en, j-pa j*pa on heojzenum. 8yle 
 up to baej ujin baejpanhcan hlap. !Snb jroji- 
 ^ij: uj- ujie ^yltaj-, j-pa j-pa pe j:oji jij:a> >am 
 J?e pi^ uj- agyltaf. Snb ne leb J?e uj- on 
 coj-tnun^. !Sc alyj- uy jrjiom y^le. 81 it j-pa. 
 
 SAXON 6. 
 
 Fabeji ujie J?u J>e in heoj:num eaji)>, beo je- 
 hal^ub J)in Noma. Cume to J>m Jiice, peojife 
 J>m pilla j-pa j-pa on eoj:une j-pile on eoj\]pe. 
 plap upejine baejhpamheu j-el uj- to baeg, 1 
 fojilete uj- ujie 8cylbe 3 j-pa j*pa pe ec j:ojile- 
 ten ]?aem Je Scylbigat pi^ uj-; 
 Coj-tnungae, 'Kh jelejre uj- oj: Yjzle.
 
 263 
 SAXON 4. 
 
 The annexed Lord's Prayer is said to have been translated 
 by King Alfred, A. D. 875. 
 
 Wilk Ess. p. 7. 
 
 SAXON 5. 
 
 The annexed is also the Lord's Prayer, from Lisle s Saxon 
 Monuments, A. D. 900. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 7. 
 
 SAXON 6: 
 
 This is taken from the Saxon homilies about the same 
 date, and is called Dano-Saxon. 
 
 Martin's Inst. p. 14.
 
 264 
 
 SAXON 7. 
 
 Fabeji me J>e ajit in heojzone, j-y gebletj*ob 
 name J?m, j-pa j-pa on heojzone anb on eajij?- 
 an, bjieob ujie bejpamlich geoj: uj- to 
 anb jroji^eoj: uj- ageltej* ujia j-pa j-pa pe 
 ^eopen a^iltenbum mum. 2nb ne leb uj- on 
 Coj-trnunge, an alyf uj- pjiom yfle. 8pa beo 
 hie. 
 
 SAXON 8. 
 
 Faebeji ujie ]?uj>e in heojrinum eaji^, beo 
 jehaljab ]?m noma ; cume to J?m jiice, 
 ^e Jm pilla j-pa on heojzune j*pilce on 
 hlaj: uj*ejine baejhpaemhce j*el uj* to bae^e. 
 *J pojilet uj- ujie j-cylbe fpae j-pae pe ec poji- 
 leten J?aen J>e j-cylbijat pi^ uj-. ^ ne gelaet 
 uj* jelaebe in conj'tunjae, ah jelej*e uj* op yjzl 
 
 SAXON 9. 
 
 Faebeji uj-eji fe ]?e ij- on heopnum, gihalgob 
 bi^ noma ^m, to cyme^ jiice J>m, j"ie pilla 
 Jnn pe j-pa on heopne "3 on eajifto, hlap uj-- 
 ejine baejhpaemhce j-el uj- to baeje, ^1 jopj- 
 jej: uj* j-ynne uj*e j-pa j:aej-thce ^ ec he j:oji- 
 jeoj:aj- e^hpelce jrylbe uj*eji, ^ ne uph on 
 laeb ^u in coj-tunje, ah ajrjiia uph j:jiom.
 
 265 
 SAXON 7. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, from the Psalter of Trinity college, 
 A. D. 1130, in the time of King Stephen. 
 
 Martin's Inst. p. 14. 
 
 SAXON 8. 
 
 Another version of the Lord's Prayer, from the Rush- 
 worth library. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 57. 
 
 SAXON 9. 
 
 This version of the same is also taken from the Rush- 
 worth library. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 58.
 
 266 
 
 SCHWABACHER. 
 
 SCLAVONIAN 1. 
 
 ^dfg 
 
 Imnopq 
 
 5 s 1i ^E .* ?*L 
 
 t u x z z he pi si 
 
 SCLAVONIAN 2. 
 
 Oche nash izghae yease nanaebaesaegh, da sue- 
 atesa ima tuoae, da predet tzaazstuia tuoae, da 
 boodct volya tuoya yaco na nebesae inazemle. 
 Ghlceb nash nasou schneei dazgd nam dnaes. 
 Jo staue nam dolghii nasha yaco imwee osta- 
 velayem dolzgnecom nashim. Ineuedi nas fpa- 
 past. No jzbaue nas ot loocauaho. Amen.
 
 267 
 
 SCHWABACHER. 
 
 So named from the town of Schwabach in Franconia, 
 where it was invented about the year 1500, and was atone 
 time much in use in Germany. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 267. 
 
 
 SCLAVONIAN 1. 
 
 Many nations, both in Europe and Asia, speak this lan- 
 guage ; it is used generally in all the eastern parts of Eu- 
 rope, except Greece, Hungary, and Wallachia ; but these 
 nations have a variety of characters. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 226. 
 
 SCLAVONIAN 2. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 24.
 
 268 
 
 SCLAVONIAN 3. 
 
 Otsse nass, ki yessi na ncbessi. Ssuhtisse ime 
 tuoie. Pridi kralyeusstuo, budi uolia tuoia, ka- 
 ko na nebu ina zemlij. Kruha nassega ssag- 
 danigad ai namga danass, I odpusciainam du- 
 ghe nasse, kako i mi odpusciamo dusuikon 
 nassijm, I nepeliai nats u napast, da izbaui 
 nats od nepriazni. Amen. 
 
 SCOTS 1. 
 
 Our fader, vhilk ar in hevin : hallovit be thy 
 name : thy kingdon cum : thy vil be doin in 
 erth, as it is in hevin. Gif uss yijs day our dai- 
 ly bred, and forgif us our sinnis, as we forgif 
 them that sin agains us. Et led us not into 
 tentation: bot delyver us from evil. Amen. 
 
 SCOTS 2. 
 
 Ar nathairne ata ar neamh, goma beannuigte 
 hainmsa, gu deig do rioghachdsa, dentaa do i- 
 holfi air dtalmhuin mar ata air neamh, tabhair 
 dhuinn anuigh ar naran laitheamhuil, agas 
 maith dhuinn ar bhfiacha, amhuil mhathmuid 
 dar bhfeicheamhnuibh, agas na leig ambuad- 
 hread sinn, achd saor sinn o olc. Oir is leatsa 
 an rioghachd an cumhachd agas an gloir gu 
 siorraidh. Amen.
 
 269 
 
 SCLAVONIAN 3. 
 
 Another reading of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Duret, p. 744. 
 Orat. Dom. p. 59. 
 
 SCOTS 1. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer used in the Lowlands of Scotland, 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 55. 
 
 SCOTS 2. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer of the Highlands of Scotland, which 
 appears to be the Celtic or Gaelic. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 49. 
 
 II ' III f ' *
 
 270 
 
 SERVIAN 1. 
 
 iv uin P A e 
 
 abvgdexz 
 
 <L TC j\ n N cr D 
 
 tzix k 1 mno p 
 
 P I T V O X\ 9 
 
 r s t u ph ch od th 
 
 SERVIAN 2. 
 
 a bgbexziz 
 
 t X.K. AJMN:^ ji 
 
 ixj c Imno p 
 
 j> i r ^ xo ^IP 
 
 r s t v ch o th sch 
 SERVIAN 3. 
 
 a b vg d echz 
 
 B-H >* I 1 E A H 
 
 zitdiyklm 
 
 S O H P G T T 
 
 xopr stu 
 
 y f h ps 6 set cz
 
 271 
 SERVIAN 1. and 2. 
 
 These are the charafters used in the most eastern parts 
 of Europe, and are said to have been invented by St. Je- 
 rome. 
 
 Duret, p. 733. 
 
 SERVIAN .3. 
 
 This alphabet is attributed to St. Cyrillus, and, like the 
 above, is used in the eastern parts of Europe. It was in- 
 vented about the year 700. 
 
 Fourn. v. 2. p. 275. 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XI.
 
 272 
 
 SERVIAN 4. 
 
 Otse nash ishe jeszi v nabeszih, poszueti sze 
 ime tvoje, pridi kralesztvo tvoje, budi volya 
 tvoja kako v nebi tako i na zemli, hlib nash 
 ushakdanni dai nan danasz, j odpuszti nam 
 duge nashe kako i mi odpusztamo dushnikom 
 nashim, j ne vovedi nasz v napaszt, da izbavi 
 nasz odi zla; jako tvoje je kralesztvo i mocz 
 i zava na veki. Amen. 
 
 SIAMIC 1. 
 
 ft 
 
 ko kho kho kho khoo ngo cho so 
 
 do to tho no bo ppo fo yo 
 
 / & 3 -&&'&<) ft? 
 
 ro lo vo so so ho o ka 
 
 SIAMIC 2. 
 
 Po raou you savang, scheu pra hai prakot 
 touk heng kon tang tai : touai pra pon. Meu- 
 ang pra co hai dai ke raou. Hai leou ning tc- 
 hai pra meuang pen-din semo savang. Ahan 
 raou touk van co hai dai ke raou van ni. Co- 
 prot bap raou, semo raou prot pou tarn bap 
 ke raou, ya hai raou tok nai kouan bap. Hai 
 poun kiac anerai tang-poang. Amen.
 
 273 
 SERVIAN 4. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 81. 
 
 SlAMIC 1. 
 
 The language of Siam partakes much of the Chinese, 
 the words being almost all monosyllables. 
 This alphabet is taken from 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XXI. 
 
 SlAMIC 2. 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 32.
 
 274 
 
 SlAMIC 3. 
 
 Poo orao giou sowen, thiou pra hai pra chot 
 tob hayn con tang lae tovae pra pon moang, 
 pra cob hay dae kie rao, hae leo neung kiae 
 pra mogan hain din somoe sou an. Ha ha rao 
 toub van coo hae due kee prao van nyy, coo 
 prot bap rao semoe rao prot pouou tarn kee 
 rao, gaa hae prao top nae coang bap, hae 
 
 SIBERIAN. 
 
 Otje mitsje kandi koendsjoenga, temlaelsengh 
 nim totlie, legate! poegandallanpoh totlie, las- 
 tiot t'sjemol alkaltei konda koedzjuga jelevi- 
 anh, lunliagel miltje monidetjelaeh keyck mi- 
 tin telaman, jeponkatsi mitin taldelpon m'itlas 
 poel mitkohdan poniatsjok tannevinol mitlae- 
 poel, je kondo dgonilask mitel olo olm'ik, kon 
 
 SPANISH 1. 
 
 Padre nuestro, que estas en los cielos, sanclifi- 
 cado sea el tu nombre ; venga a nos el tu rey- 
 no : fagase tu voluntad, assi en la tierra, como 
 en el cielo. El pan nuestro de cada dia da nos 
 lo oy : y perdona nos nuestras deudas, assi co- 
 mo nostros perdonamos a nuestros deudores. 
 Y no nos dexes caer en la tentation: mas li- 
 bra nos de mal ; porgue tuyo es el reyno, y la 
 potentia, y la gloria, por todos los siglos. Am.
 
 275 
 
 SlAMIC 3* 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 22. 
 
 SIBERIAN. 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer, from a manuscript in 
 my possession, taken from Witsius's Description of Tartary . 
 
 SPANISH 1; 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, from the New Testament in this lan- 
 guage, Amst. 1625. 
 
 Wilk.Ess.p.435
 
 276 
 
 SPANISH 2. 
 
 Padre nuestro que estas en los cielos, sanftifi- 
 cado sea tu nombre, venga tu reyno, hagase 
 tu volontad assi en la tierra como en el cielo, 
 danos hoy nuestro pan cotidiano ; y perdona 
 nos nuestras deudas assi como nos otros per- 
 donamos a nuestros deudores, y no nos metas 
 en tentacion, mas libra nos de mal, porque tu- 
 yo es el reyno y la potencia &c. Amen. 
 
 SPANISH 3- 
 
 Padre nuestro que estas en el cielo, sanftifica- 
 do sea tu nombre; venga nos tu reyno: haga- 
 se tu voluntad, assi en la tierra como en el ci- 
 elo ; el pan nuestro de cada dia da nos le oy ; 
 y perdona nos nuestras deudas assi como no- 
 sotros perdonamos a nuestros deudores ; y no 
 nos dexes caer en tentacion, mas libra nos de 
 mal. Amen. 
 
 SWEDISH 1. 
 
 Fader war som ast i himmelen, helgat warde 
 titt nampn ; till komme titt ricke, skei tin wi- 
 lie sa pajordenne som i himmelen: wart dag- 
 liga brod giff oss i dagh ; och forlat oss wara 
 skulder sa som ock wi forlaten them oss skyl- 
 dege aro : och in leed oss icke i frestelse ; ut an 
 frals oss i fra ondo. Tii riiket ar titt, och ma-
 
 277 
 SPANISH 2. 
 
 Another reading of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Oral. Dom. Amst. p. 45. 
 
 SPANISH 3. 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer in modern Spanish, 
 communicated to me by a learned gentleman. 
 
 SWEDISH 1. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer, from a bible in this language, Stockh. 
 1674. 
 
 Wilk. Ess. p. 435.
 
 278 
 
 SWEDISH 2. 
 
 Fader war, som ast i himmelen, helgadt wardc 
 titt namn : tilkomme titt rike : ske tin wilje, sa- 
 som i himmelen, sa ock pajorden: gifossi 
 dag wart dageliga brod : och forlat oss wara 
 skulder, sasom ock wi forlate them oss skyld- 
 ige aro : ock inled oss icke i frestelse, utan frals 
 oss ifran ondo : ty riket ar titt och magten och 
 harligheten i ewighet. Amen. 
 
 SYRIAC 1. 
 
 hhz v hdgb a 
 
 \Y .ufi)-ci c^D *vX .c^ .s^v -V 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 JtL .IJE- ^1 -uQ .CS^ .uQ 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 
 SYRIAC 2. 
 
 ** l ctcn^i 
 
 hhzv hdg b a 
 
 ee s n m 1 k j th 
 
 ^-*\ JI-C^ 
 
 t sch r q ss p
 
 279; 
 SWEDISH 2. 
 
 This copy of the Lord's Prayer, as now used in Sweden, 
 was given to me by my friend the Rev. S. Nisser, mi- 
 nister to the Swedish congregation, East Smithfield. 
 
 SYRIAC; 
 
 This language is one of those several diale&s, com- 
 monly called the Oriental tongues, and is pretended to 
 have been the mother of them all. It became a distinct 
 tongue so early as the days of JACOB ; for what his father 
 in law and uncle, LABAN, of Padan-aram or Mesopota- 
 mia, calls jfegar-sabadutha, is, by JACOB, called Galeed. 
 The Syriac was not only the language of Syria, but also 
 of Mesopotamia, Chaldea; for there is no more difference 
 between the Chaldean and Syriac, than between the En- 
 glish and Scots; Assyria, and after the Babylonish capti- 
 vity, Palestine. 
 
 There are three dialefts of the Syrian tongue ; first, the 
 Aramean, or Syriac, properly so called, which is the most 
 elegant, and used in Mesopotamia, by the inhabitants of 
 Roha, or Edessa, and Harran, and the outer Syria : se- 
 cond, the dialeft of Palestine, spoken by the inhabitants 
 of Damascus, Mount Libanus, and the inner Syria: third, 
 the Chaldean or Nabathean dialePt, the most rude and un- 
 polished of the three, and used in the mountainous parts 
 of Assyria, and in the villages of Irak or Babylonia. 
 
 The Syriac character is very ancient, and supposed, by. 
 some, to have been in use above 300 years B. C. 
 
 There is a number of books written in this language, 
 very little known to the Europeans; but what this tongue 
 is most to be valued for, are the excellent translations 
 therein of the Old and New Testament ; which equal, if 
 they do not surpass, those of any other language. 
 
 Universal Hist. Vol. 1. p. 377. 
 
 SYRIAC 1. 
 
 Duret gives this as the most ancient Hebrew character, 
 and intimates that it was used both by ABRAHAM and 
 MOSES. P- 364. 
 
 SYRIAC 2. 
 
 This is the Stranghelo, or ancient Chaldean, long since 
 gone out of use ; the Lord's Prayer is to be seen in this 
 character in the second volume of the Propaganda in my 
 possession. 
 
 The annexed was copied' from 
 
 Castellus's Lexicon, Vol. 1. p. 2.
 
 280 
 
 SYRIAC 3. 
 
 hhzv hdgb a 
 
 ^ 33 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 ee s n m 1 k j th 
 
 t sch r q ss p 
 
 SYRIAC 4. 
 
 1 D en \ 
 
 hh z v h d g 
 
 b a 
 
 ee s n m 1 k j th 
 
 t sch r q ss p 
 
 SYRIAC 5. 
 
 o en ? 
 
 vhd 
 
 g 
 
 hh 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 L * 5 .> S B 
 
 t sh r q ts p
 
 281 
 SYRIAC 3. 
 
 The Stranghelo character, called Duplex; but no men- 
 tion is made of it's use. 
 
 Castell. Lex. Vol. l.p.2. 
 
 SYRIAC 4. 
 
 Called Nestorian* These Syrians were spread over Tar- 
 tary about the twelfth century, whence they established 
 missions. 
 
 Castell. Lex. Vol. l.p.2. 
 
 SYRIAC 5. 
 
 This is also a Nestorian. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. 2.
 
 282 
 
 SYRIAC 6. 
 
 hh z v h d g b a 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 Iv XM ^1 >sO .v!7 .\o 
 
 t sch r q ts p 
 SYRIAC 7. 
 
 *A/-Ho-,<?^t-^roL H 
 
 hhz v hd g b a 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 ^ A V 
 
 t sh r q ts 
 
 SYRIAC 8. 
 
 Abhoun dbhaschmajo. Nethkadasch schmoch 
 Tithe malchouthoch. Nehve zebjonoch, ajch- 
 ano dbhaschmajo, oph b'ar'ho. Habh Ian lach 
 mo dsunkonan jaumono. Vaschbouk Ian chav 
 bain, ajchano d'oph chnan schbhakan Pcha- 
 jobhain. V'lo ta'alan Inesjouno. Elo pazan 
 men bischo. Metiil ddiloch hi malchoutho 
 v'chajlo, v'theschbouchtho 1'olam ol'min.
 
 283 
 SYRIAC 6. 
 
 Duret, p. 365, says, that this alphabet is composed of 
 small, or running letters, with which the Syrians write 
 more freely on account of their joining. 
 
 SYRIAC 7. 
 
 This is the modern alphabet, as used in printing at this 
 day. 
 
 SYRIAC 8. 
 
 The literal reading of the Lord's Prayer, from a new 
 testament in this language, Hamb. 1663. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 12.
 
 284 
 
 SYRIAC 9. 
 
 Abun dbhascmaja: netquadasch scmoch: the- 
 the malkuthoch : nehva zebjonoch aikano db- 
 hascmaja apf barea hablan lahhma dsunquo- 
 nan jaumona : wasebuk Ian hhaubain vehhat- 
 thin, aikana dapf hhnan scbaquan lehhaibhin : 
 welah thelan lenishjiina: el ah fatsah menbisca 
 mettul dedihloch hih malkutta wehhaila wet- 
 escbuhhta leehlam ehlmin. Amin, 
 
 SYRO-GALILEAN. 
 
 of ^j A^AlA O 
 
 hh z vhdg b a 
 
 aa s n m 1 k i th 
 
 AToV^Ajy^^ 
 
 t sh r q ts p 
 
 S YRO-HEBRAIC. 
 
 hhzvhdgba 
 
 O X v3 OovJ -3 ^ V 
 
 s n n m 1 k i th 
 
 sh 
 
 r q ts p aa
 
 285 
 SYRIAC 9. 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer in the Stranghelo style. 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 6. 
 
 SYRO-GALILEAN. 
 
 This is more properly called an ancient Chaldean, and 
 is said to have been used by some oriental Christians, calling 
 themselves disciples of John the Baptist. They inhabited 
 the city of Bassora and its environs. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. VII. 
 
 SYRO-HEBRAIC. 
 
 This character was much used formerly by the Jews in 
 Syria. 
 
 Fourn. Vol. 2. p. 227.
 
 286 
 
 SUMATRAN. 
 
 One 
 
 Chit 
 
 Two 
 
 Nung 
 
 Three 
 
 Sa 
 
 Four 
 
 See 
 
 Five 
 
 Ingo 
 
 Six 
 
 La 
 
 Seven 
 
 Chee 
 
 Eight 
 
 Poe 
 
 Nine 
 
 Ca 
 
 Ten 
 
 Tsap 
 
 The sun 
 
 Jet 
 
 A man 
 
 Tapb 
 
 The moon 
 
 Geuex 
 
 A woman 
 
 Tsawa 
 
 The stars 
 
 Tehee 
 
 The head 
 
 Taow 
 
 The sky 
 
 Thee 
 
 The hair 
 
 Tamung 
 
 Rain 
 
 Ho 
 
 The face 
 
 Beein 
 
 The sea 
 
 Hat 
 
 The eyes 
 
 Bwaclieu 
 
 Wind 
 
 Whang 
 
 The nose 
 
 Pee 
 
 TARTARJC 1. 
 
 O JAJ *&j <xXwjJU 0>J (^ j*jk*JjJ
 
 287 
 
 SUMATRAN. 
 
 This specimen of the language is taken from Sidney 
 Parkinson's Voyage, p. 198, and is very different from the 
 vocabulary of tongues used in this island, given by W. 
 Marsden, Esq. p. 168 of his work, and which my reader 
 will find in the appendix, under the names of ACHEEN, 
 BATTA, REJANC, and LAMPOON. 
 
 TARTARIC 1. 
 
 The Tartaric alphabet in general use is the Arabic. 
 The annexed specimen is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Oral. Dom. p. 19.
 
 288 S 
 
 TARTARIC 2. 
 
 Ya Atamuz ki yuksek ghioghda sen, aadin ari 
 olsoun, padishah-lighin ghelsoun, boiruklerin 
 itmish olsoun ghioghda kibi dahi yirda, her- 
 ghiunaghi ekmekimiizi vir bize bu-ghiun, va 
 bourgilerimuzi bize baghishla nitakim biz da- 
 hi bourgilulerimuzi baghishleriz, va bizi sini- 
 sha ghiturma, lakin yaramazdan bizi sali-vir, 
 zira-ki senungh-dur padishah-Iik va kadirlik. 
 
 TARTARIC 3. 
 
 Jez me koendind jejand nopkon, noeni nip 
 tat, tule noetkotsi tat, tat tenel tat tat nopk- 
 on its jots jogodt, nai me tsjelelemi tallel me- 
 kosjek titap, kvodtsjedi mekosjek kolzja mei, 
 tat mei kvodtsjedi kolzja mei, nick jgosjid 
 kvondik mat kekend, tat mat losogod; tat tat 
 noedkbtsi oroep oevorganin tarn noen. Nat. 
 
 TARTARIC 4. 
 
 Abcade thege megni ama. Sini kebou endou- 
 ringhe okini. Sini couron tchikini. Nade ab- 
 cade adali sini couninde atchaboukini. Jnen- 
 ghitari i tchecou enenhhi mende poureou, ke- 
 li kerenni endeboucoube megni coue'boure- 
 ou. Keli membe pouyende oume togimboure. 
 Elemanga membe egetchi tchailaboureou. 
 Ere sonkoi okini.
 
 289 
 TARTARIC 2. 
 
 The literal reading of the preceding Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dora. p. 19. 
 
 TARTARIC 3. 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer of the Ostiak Tartars, 
 from Witsius's description of Tartary, Vol. 2. p. 633, of 
 which I have a correft MS. copy* 
 
 TARTARIC 4, 
 
 Another reading of the Lord's Prayer in the Chinese 
 
 stile. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 13.
 
 290 
 
 TARTARIC 5. 
 
 pa pa ka na ou ou o i e a 
 
 7 1^^1'1lI T )i J 4 i TY 
 
 ra khe ya ts ts ma la tha sea sa 
 
 }^^^Y Y <c1 
 
 sci se tche tchi ja tsa tea fa oiia 
 TARTARIC 6. 
 
 <!> =1 H d 4 4 H H H 
 
 pa pa ka na ou ou o i e a 
 
 H > H 4 *J -h M J ^* 
 
 ra khe ya ts ts. ma la tha sea sa 
 
 sci se tche tchi ja tsa tea fa oiia 
 
 TRTARIC 7. 
 
 J' ^ A J t 
 
 pa pa ka na ou ou o i e a 
 
 ra khe ya ts ts ma la tha sea sa 
 
 ^3?:2;t,a> 
 
 sci se tche tchi ja tsa tea fa oiia
 
 291 
 TARTARIC 5. 
 
 The Mantcheou Tartars use the same alphabet or cha- 
 rafters as those of the Great Mogul, and write them from 
 top to bottom, after the manner of the Chinese. 
 
 The annexed is a specimen of the initial letters. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XXIII. 
 
 TARTARIC 6. 
 
 A specimen of the medial letters of the alphabet of the 
 
 Mantcheou Tartars. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XXIII. 
 
 TARTARIC 7. 
 
 A specimen of the final letters of the alphabet of the 
 
 Mantcheou Tartars. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XXIII
 
 292 
 
 TALENGA. 
 
 a a I I ou ou roii rou 
 
 lou lou e a'i o aou au aha 
 
 ka k'ha ga g'ha nga tcha tcha ja 
 
 j'ha igna ta t'ha da d'ha na ta t'ha 
 
 da d'ha na pa p'ha ba b'ha ma ya 
 
 # o <d ^r | ^> XP sy^ 
 
 ra la oa cha cha sa ha la k'cha 
 TAMOULIC. 
 
 ka na scha gna da na ta na 
 
 ui ID uj T oo ij y^cvr 
 
 pi ma ja ra la V a ra la 
 
 rra na
 
 293 
 TALENGA. 
 
 This is the alphabet of a province of the powerful king- 
 dom of Decan, in India ; the language is vulgarly called 
 Badega. In the French library is a grammar and other 
 books in this tongue. 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XIX. 
 
 TAMOULIC. 
 
 This is also called Malabaric, and has been usually 
 written on palm-leaves with a pointed tool, but it is now 
 much in use in India in letter-press printing. 
 
 This radical alphabet is taken from 
 
 Encyc. Franc, pi. XIX.
 
 294 
 
 TCHOKA. 
 
 The eyes Chi Eyebrows Tara 
 
 Forehead Quechetan Nose Eton 
 
 Mouth Tsara Teeth Yma 
 
 Tongue Aon Beard Tehe 
 
 Back Saitourou Belly Hone 
 
 Fire Houncohi A dog Tamoui 
 
 The sun Tsouhou The wind Tebaira 
 
 Yes He, hi No Hya 
 
 To eat Ajbe . To drink Cbuka 
 
 To sleep Etaro To snore Mouaro 
 
 The hair Chapa The arms T^cfa J0n 
 
 The wrist Tay-ha The hand 7#y pompe 
 
 The sea Tchoiza A ship Kaiani 
 
 A bow Couhon A needle Kaine 
 
 A feather Qs-lari A fly Omoch 
 
 A musket TiKJfo A cabin Pouhau 
 
 THIBETAN. 
 
 kha kha k ngha ciha ciha cia gnia 
 
 5 T W ^ TT 7^ZT*TT 
 
 tha tha ta na pha pha pa ma 
 
 & & STT T 3 T a^'T 
 
 tzha tzha tza va sciha sa ha ja 
 
 ra la scia sa hah 
 
 aa
 
 295 
 
 TCHOKA. 
 
 This specimen is copied from the vocabulary of the lan- 
 guage, in 
 
 Perouse, Vol. 2. p. 488. 
 
 THIBETAN. 
 
 The alphabet of the Lamas of Thibet, taken from the 
 second volume of the Propaganda Fide.
 
 296 
 
 TEUTONIC 1. 
 
 abeddfgh 
 
 I L <H*N D n 5 R 
 
 i 1 m n o p q r 
 
 s tux 
 TEUTONIC 2. 
 
 r P "w 5> i 
 
 b g d d f i k 
 
 1 mmnop r s 
 
 TUNGUSIAN. 
 
 Aminmoen moengi avagoe negdaoegidadoe. 
 Garisjegan gerbisch singi. Jemesjegal ogdigoe 
 singi. Osjegan sitlu singi on negdadoe do en- 
 dradoe. Kiltere moengi inegdoe boekal mo- 
 endoe tikin. Akakal moendoe ogbi moengi on 
 boe amnenkiteref kotatsjaldoe moendoeck. 
 Aminkalivra moendoe jeregdoevi. Ajikal mo- 
 endoe malgadoeck. On singi bisin ogdidgoe 
 mandi baschin jereger. Tesje.
 
 297 
 TEUTONIC 1. 
 
 This alphabet was taken from an ancient manuscript in 
 the cathedral of Wurtzberg, in Franconia. 
 
 Fourn. Vol. 2. p. 272. 
 
 TEUTONIC 2. 
 
 This alphabet is taken from 
 
 Encyc. Britan. pi. IX. 
 
 TUNGUSIAN. 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer, from Witsius's de- 
 scription of Tartary. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 14.
 
 298 
 
 TURKISH 1. 
 
 
 
 _ x O 
 
 
 
 A; 
 
 TURKISH 2. 
 
 Bizoum atamuz kih gouglerdeh sin. Senun 
 adun mukaddes olsoun. Senun melcoutun gel 
 soun. Senun iradetun olsoun nitegim gougde 
 dahi jerde. Hergoungi bizoum etmegemouzi 
 ver bize bougioun. Vabisoum bourgsleroumi 
 bize bagischle nitegim biz dahi bizoum bour- 
 gslouleroumuze bagischlerouz. Vabisi tagsrib 
 adchal etma. Lekin scherirden bizi ne-gsat 
 eile. Zira senunder melcut vesultanet vemegs 
 di ta ebed. Amin.
 
 299 
 TURKISH 1. 
 
 The Turkish alphabet is the same as the Arabic, No. 2, 
 (which see) with the addition of five more letters. 
 The annexed is the Lord's Prayer in that charafter. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 18- 
 
 TURKISH 2* 
 
 The literal reading of the above. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 18.
 
 300 
 
 TYRIAN. 
 
 ^ K ? 4 * q 9 D 
 
 abg deuzh 
 
 2^<<\y<j i 
 
 th i k 1m n so 
 
 r 7 > J* X 
 
 p ts q r sc t 
 
 VIRGINIAN. 
 
 Nooshun kesukquot. Quittiana tamunach ko- 
 owesuonk. Peyaumooutch kukketassootamo- 
 onk. Kuttenantamoonk nen nach ohkeit nea- 
 ne kesukquut. Nummeetsuongash asekesuko- 
 kish assamaijneau yeuyeu kesukod. Kah ah- 
 qiiontamai inneau numat cheseongash neane 
 matchenehu queagig nuta quonta mounonog 
 Ah que sagkompaguna innean en qutchhua. 
 
 VANDAL. 
 
 Woschzi nasch kens sy nunebv, nsvesche me- 
 no twojo, psiszknam kralostvo twojo, sestavi 
 wola twoja yako nanebo ytu nazemi, kleb 
 nasch dneisthi day nam schnisz. A wodai nam 
 wini nashe, ak my wodawani winikom nas- 
 zym, A newesich nas dopitowaine ; Ale um- 
 osz nas od slego. Li,
 
 301 
 TYRIAN. 
 
 Fournier, Vol. 2. p. 274, calls this Tyrian, or Punic, 
 but is silent as to any authority. 
 
 VIRGINIAN. 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 64. 
 
 VANDAL: 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 80*.
 
 302 
 
 WALLACHIAN 1. 
 
 Tatul nostru csinye jesh in cseruj. Szvinczie 
 sze numelye tuo. Sze vii imparaczia ta. Fii 
 voja ta cum in cserui, asha shi pe pamuntul. 
 Punye nostru de te zilelie da noi asztesz. Jar- 
 ta greshalelye nostre cum shi noi jartam a 
 greshitilor nostri. Shi nu dues pe noi inka la 
 iszpitira. Shi mentujeshte pe noi de ro. Amin. 
 
 WALLACHIAN 2. 
 
 Parintye nostru csela cse jesh in cseri. Svenc- 
 zie sze numelye tuo. Vii imparaczia ta. Facse 
 sze voja ta cum in cseri asha shi pe pamuntul. 
 Punye nostru csaszecsio da noo asztesz. Shi 
 lasza noo datorilye nostre cum shi noi leszam 
 datornicsilor nostri, shi nu dues pe noi la isz- 
 pitira. Shi mentujeste pe noi de hitlyanul. 
 
 WALDENSES. 
 
 Our narme ata air neamb'. Beanich atanim 
 gu diga do riogda gu denta du hoill, air talm' 
 in mar ta ar neamb' tabhar d'im an miigh ar 
 naran limb 5 ail, agus mai d'uine ar fiach am- 
 bail near marhmhid ar fiacha. Na leig si'n 
 amb' aribh ach soarsa shin on. Ole or sletsa 
 rioghta combta agns gloir gnsibhiri. Amen.
 
 303 
 WALLACHIAN 1 and 2. 
 
 These are two dialefts of the Wallachian tongue, of 
 which the reader may be the better judge, they being both 
 given in the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 77. 
 
 WALDENSES. 
 
 This language appears to be the Celtic, and upon com- 
 parison with the Irish, and that of the Highlands of Scot- 
 land, will be found to be nearly the same. 
 
 The annexed is the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 39.
 
 304 
 
 WALLOON. 
 
 Paerinthele nostru cela ce esti en cheri. Svin- 
 tzas caese numele teu. Vie enperetziae ta. Fa- 
 caese voe ta, cum en tzer asesi pre paementu. 
 Paene noastre tza saetzioace dae noaae astezi, 
 Si lase noaae datorii le noastre, cum si noi se 
 laesaem datornkzilor nostri. Si nu dutze preno 
 i la ispitire : Tze ne mentueste prenoi de vic- 
 lianul. Amin. 
 
 WELCH 1* 
 
 A A N] ^ I O <> Y 
 
 aaeei o 6u 
 
 uw wy b vmm 
 
 WhNlfc<K 
 
 v p ph mh f c 9 ngh 
 
 g ng t th nh d z n 
 
 H UK Y V- Y h k 
 
 n 11 1 rh r s h . hw
 
 305 
 WALLOON, 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. p. 45. 
 
 WELCH 1. 
 
 The alphabet of these primitive letters contains sixteen 
 radical characters and powers, which have twenty-four se- 
 condary ones, modifications, or inflexions, making forty 
 in all ; and it went under the name of Cselbren y Beirz, 
 the billet of signs of the Bards, or the BARDIC ALPHA- 
 BET. 
 
 The discerning antiquary will naturally be desirous of 
 knowing in what manner this curious relick was preserved 
 to the present time: in reply to which; in the obscure and 
 mountainous parts of Wales, the system of Bardism is still 
 to be found entire, bu f nore known to the world by the 
 name of Druidism, wh ' was properly that branch of Bard- 
 ism relating to religio , and education. Bardism was uni- 
 versal, and comprehenafed all the knowledge or philosophy 
 of the ancient times ; Druidism was it's religious code ; 
 and Ovatism, it's arts and sciences. 
 
 The preservation of the character may be principally 
 attributed to it's own provision and means, whereby tradi- 
 tion is reduced to a science. 
 
 I am indebted for this and the following article to my 
 ingenious friend W. Owen. F. A. S, whose authority can- 
 not be doubted.
 
 306 
 
 WELCH 2. 
 
 One 
 
 Two 
 
 Three 
 
 Four 
 
 Five 
 
 Six 
 
 Seven 
 
 Eight 
 
 Nine 
 
 Ten 
 
 A hedge 
 
 A hatchet 
 
 A garment 
 
 A canoe 
 
 To speak 
 
 Yes 
 
 No 
 
 NEW ZEALAND. 
 
 Katahe Father 
 Karoo a Son t 
 Katarroo The eyes 
 Kawha The nose 
 Kareenta A di g 
 Kaonoo Fish " 
 Kawhetoo Ear-^ells 
 Kawarroo A stone 
 Kaceva Water 
 KacahaoroA house 
 Pateea A nail 
 Kochee Viauals 
 Hecacahoo Tataow 
 Hewaca To paddle 
 Qrero Good 
 A a Bad 
 
 Kaowra Look you 
 
 Papa 
 
 Hetamach 
 
 He matta 
 
 He eih 
 
 Egoorree 
 
 Teyka 
 
 Hepaooa 
 
 Powhattoo 
 
 Hewai 
 
 Heawhai 
 
 Ewhab 
 
 Eci 
 
 Emaho 
 
 Hoggee 
 
 Apoorotoo 
 
 Ekeeno 
 
 Eta eta,
 
 307 
 WELCH 2. 
 
 The original manner of writing among the ancient Bri- 
 tons was by cutting the letters w\th a knife upon sticks, 
 which were most commonly squared, and sometimes formed 
 into three sides; consequently, a single stUl^ contained 
 either four or three lines. (SeeEzekiel, ch.xxxvn, v. 16.) 
 The squares were used for general subjects, and for stan- 
 zas of four lines in poetry ; the trilateral ones were adapted 
 to triades, and for a peculiar kind pf ancient metre, called 
 Triban, and Englyn Milwyr, or triplet, and the warriors' 
 verse. 
 
 Several sticks, with writing upon them, were put toge- 
 ther, forming a kind of frame, as represented in the an- 
 nexed page, which was called Peithynen, or Elucidator ; 
 and was so constructed, that each stick might be turned for 
 the facility of reading, the end of each running out alter- 
 nately on both sides of the frame. 
 
 The following is a literal reading of this curious speci- 
 men in the moderft orthography, with a correcl translation. 
 
 Ary v y doeth yw pwyll : 
 Bid ezain alltud : 
 Cyvnewid a haelion: 
 Diengid rhy wan eid rhygadarn ; 
 Enwawg mei9iad o'i 09 : 
 Goiaen awel yn nghyving: 
 Hir oreistez i ogan : 
 Llawer car byw i Indeg. 
 
 TRANSLATION, 
 
 The weapon of the wise is reason. 
 
 Let the exile be moving. 
 
 Commerce with generous ones. 
 
 Let the very feeble run away ; let the very powerful proceed. 
 
 The swineherd is proud of his swine. 
 
 A gale is almost ice in a narrow place. 
 
 Long penance to slander. 
 
 The frail Indeg has many living relations. 
 
 NEW ZEALAND. 
 
 Taken from the vocabulary of this language. 
 
 Parkinson's Voy. p. 126
 
 308 APPENDIX, 
 
 ACHASTHEN. 
 
 Moukala Oatis Capes Outiti Is 
 1 2345 
 
 JEtesake Kaleis Oulousmarakhen Pak Tonta 
 67 8 9 10 
 
 ACHEEN. 
 
 One Sah Husband Lackaye 
 
 Two Dua Wife Beenaye 
 
 Three Tloo Father Bah 
 
 Four Paat Mother Mau 
 
 Five Leemung Head Oolou 
 
 Six 'Nam Eyes Matta 
 
 Seven Taojoo Kfose Eedoon 
 
 Eight D'lappan Hair 0A 
 
 Nine Sakoorang Teeth Geguy 
 
 Ten Saploo Hand Jarrooay 
 
 Day or aye Night Mallam 
 
 White Po0to Black 
 
 Die Mattay Good 
 
 Fire Appooy Water 
 
 Cocoa nut 0^ Rice Breeagh,
 
 APPENDIX. 309 
 
 Ac HAST LIEN. 
 
 A colony of North California. The fiUmerbas colonies 
 which divide this country, although very near each other, 
 live insulated, and have each a different language. 
 
 Annexed is the vocabulary of numeration, which alone 
 is given, from the great difficulty of learning the tongue. 
 
 Perouse, Vol. 2. p. 243. 
 
 ACHEEN. 
 
 This is one of the languages spoken in the island of 
 Sumatra, taken from the comparative vobabulary. 
 
 Marsden, p. 168.
 
 310 APPENDIX. 
 
 BATTA 1. 
 
 a ha na ma ra ta ba wa 
 
 ^>^><^ < < C <^ 
 
 s& ga la pa gna ja da nya 
 
 c eea oo 
 
 BATTA 2. 
 
 One 
 
 Sadah 
 
 Husband 
 
 Morah 
 
 Two 
 
 Duo 
 
 Wife 
 
 Aboo 
 
 Three 
 
 Toloo 
 
 Father 
 
 Ammah 
 
 Four 
 
 Opat 
 
 Mother 
 
 Enang 
 
 Five 
 
 Leemah 
 
 Head 
 
 Ooloo 
 
 Six 
 
 Onam 
 
 Eyes 
 
 Mahtak 
 
 Seven 
 
 Paitoo 
 
 Nose 
 
 Aygong 
 
 Eight 
 
 Ooalloo 
 
 Hair 
 
 Oboo 
 
 Nine 
 
 Seeah 
 
 Teeth 
 
 Ningee 
 
 Ten 
 
 Sapooloo 
 
 Night 
 
 Borgning 
 
 White 
 
 Nabottar 
 
 Black 
 
 Naberong 
 
 Pie 
 
 Mahtay 
 
 Good 
 
 Dengan 
 
 Fire 
 
 Ahpee 
 
 Water 
 
 Ayck 
 
 Cocoa 
 
 nut Crambee 
 
 Rice 
 
 Dahano
 
 APPENDIX. 311 
 
 BATTA 1. 
 
 The alphabet of one of the principal internal languages 
 of Sumatra. 
 
 Marsden, p. 168. 
 
 BATTA 2. 
 
 This specimen of the Batta language, which is spoken 
 in the island of Sumatra, is taken from the comparative 
 
 vocabulary. 
 
 Marsden, p. 168.
 
 , 
 
 312 APPENDIX. 
 
 BARMAN. 
 
 QQ8 OWCQSD<S(CO^^ 
 
 k kh g gh ng z zh z zh gn t 
 
 OJODOOCOOO ^> O <S> 
 
 ch d dh n t th d dh n p ph 
 
 OD tfOoqcoooocpgCTS) 
 bbhmjrlvshla 
 
 BENG ALLEE. 
 
 Bap pa kita, jang adda de surga, Namma-mou 
 jadi bersakti, radjat-mou mendarang, kand- 
 hatimou menjadi de bumi seperti de surga, ro- 
 ti kita derri sa hari-hari membrikan kita sa 
 hari inila, Makka ber-ampunla padakita doo- 
 sa kita, seperti kita ber-ampun-akan siapa 
 bersala kapada kita, d'jang-an hentar kita ka- 
 pada tjobahan, tetapi lepasken kita dari jang 
 d'jakat: karna mou pun'ja radjat daan kau- 
 wassahan daan berbessaran sampey kakakal. 
 Amin.
 
 APPENDIX. 313 
 
 BARMAN. 
 
 This alphabet is used in the kingdom of Ava; also in 
 the island of Ceylon, a thousand miles distant, where it 
 is called Cingalese. 
 
 The order and power of the letters are the same as the 
 Nagari, (which see.) 
 
 The alphabet is copied from that celebrated work, the 
 Propaganda, Vol. 1. 
 
 BENGALLEE. 
 
 The reading of the Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Amst. p. 23.
 
 314 APPENDIX. 
 
 COURLANDIC. 
 
 Tews mus kut tu esch in debbes. Sweerti to 
 tau waertsch, Innekas moms tau walstieb. Tau 
 spraets noteek in debbes kaverssu semes. Mus 
 schjodenysch to maisyd do tu moms schjod- 
 een. Pomettees mus parradus kames pomme- 
 tem sau paradnekem. Newet moms eck sch- 
 jan. Laune kaedenaeschjen: Ais to tes tau 
 walstybe, tau speax, tau goetsch, tau musiga 
 besgat. Omen. 
 
 DOMESDAY. 
 
 Jtvobt ten de ead fern .CRIZ .Boln tenuitT.R.E.y 
 geldbfp dim hida . Tra . e . dim car . fl[ ibi . e cu . 1 1 1 1 
 bord .7 in .ac pci .7 vn . q^ pafturse ling. 7 in. q^. 
 in lat . Valet . x . fol. 
 
 Ivobt ten de ead HERPERE . Aluuard tenuit T.R.E. 
 7 geldB^p.iii.hid.Tra.e.iii .car .In dnio.e . i. 
 car 7 dimd.7 in . ferui .711. cofcez . Ibi moliri redd. 
 xx . denar .7 ix . ac pti .7 mi . q-a. pafturas .7 i . q% 
 filux.j un burgs redd . vui. denar . Valuit . c . folict. 
 Modo. mi. lib. 
 
 ij q ij 
 
 In ead nilla ten Robt de ipfa fern dimid hid. Sau 
 
 9 i ' * ' -vl 
 
 uin tenuity Maner T.R.E . Tra. e. dim car . Valet. 
 
 xn . fot .7 vi . denar. 
 
 Ipfa ten WILCESWDE. Aluuard tenuit T.R.E. 7 geldft 
 
 tj ) Ij t, 
 
 jp.in. hid 7dim.7ii.partib]univ .Tra.e.m. arc
 
 APPENDIX. 315 
 
 COURLANDIC. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Orat. Dom. Arast. p. 84. 
 
 DOMESDAY. 
 
 In page 50 of this book, I have given a specimen of the 
 Norman character, cut by Cottrell, which was intended for 
 this celebrated national work. The present is an impres- 
 sion from the same types that the folio edition of Domesday 
 was printed with, and is composed from that part relating 
 to the county of Dorset, p. 84-6. This letter was cut by 
 my late friend Joseph Jackson, in a manner more success- 
 ful than his fellow-labourer : he also engraved a variety of 
 types for the Rolls of Parliament, a work which will ever 
 refleft honor on the good taste of the present reign. 
 
 I am indebted to my friend and antiquary, J. Nichols, 
 for enabling me to gratify the curious with this specimen.
 
 316 APPENDIX. 
 
 LAMPOON 1. 
 
 y 
 
 ka ga gna pa ba ma ta 
 
 da 
 
 na cha ja gnia eea a 
 
 is* 
 
 ha 
 
 la 
 
 ra 
 
 wa 
 
 LAMPOON 2. 
 
 One 
 
 % 
 
 Husband 
 
 Cadjoon 
 
 Two 
 
 Row ah 
 
 Wife 
 
 Cadjoon 
 
 Three 
 
 Tulloo 
 
 Father 
 
 Bapa 
 
 Four 
 
 Amp ah 
 
 Mother 
 
 Eenah 
 
 Five 
 
 Leemah 
 
 Head 
 
 Oolooh 
 
 Six 
 
 Annam 
 
 Eyes 
 
 Mattah 
 
 Seven 
 
 Pcetoo 
 
 Nose 
 
 Eerong 
 
 Eight 
 
 Ooalloo 
 
 Hair 
 
 Booho 
 
 Nine 
 
 Seewah 
 
 Teeth 
 
 Eepan 
 
 Ten 
 
 Pooloo 
 
 Hand 
 
 Chooloo 
 
 Day 
 
 Rannee 
 
 White 
 
 Mandack 
 
 Night 
 
 Beenghee 
 
 Black 
 
 Malloom 
 
 Good 
 
 Buttie 
 
 Die 
 
 Jahal 
 
 Fire 
 
 Aphooy 
 
 Water 
 
 Wye 
 
 Earth 
 
 Tanno 
 
 Cocoa nut 
 
 Clappah 
 
 Rice 
 
 Beeas 
 
 Fish 
 
 Ewah 
 
 Hog 
 
 Babooye 
 
 Moon 
 
 Boolan 
 
 GOD 
 
 Alia -t alia 
 
 I 
 
 Gniah
 
 APPENDIX. 317 
 
 LAMPOON 1. 
 
 The alphabet of one of the principal languages spoken 
 in the island of Sumatra. 
 
 Mar den, p. 168. 
 
 LAMPOON 2. 
 
 This specimen of the Lampoon tongue, which is spoken 
 in Sumatra, is taken from the Comparative Vocabulary. 
 
 Marsden, p. 168.
 
 318 APPENDIX. 
 
 MONKS. 
 
 2t KK 1st SBmlto. 
 
 SCLAVONIAN. 
 
 abvgdejzz 
 
 Hi' KAMHOn 
 
 i i k 1 m n o p r 
 
 s t u ph ch tz ch sch tsch 
 
 .z A| A ?fi e ro -r A v 
 
 ier ieri ieer iat e yu ya th isch 
 REJANG 1. 
 
 ka ga nga ta da na pa ba 
 
 WA^/w/pyx w 
 
 ma cha ja nia sa ra la eea 
 
 Xv*//^/W,frV/V # o 
 ooa hha mba ngga nda nja a
 
 APPENDIX. 319 
 
 MONKS. 
 
 This alphabet was copied From the original paper, which 
 was sent to the late Edv ard Cave, and is inserted in the 
 Gentleman's Magazine for 1753, p. 170; which paper 
 was given to me by my friend J. Nichols, F. A. S. the 
 present proprietor of that valuable publication. 
 
 The alphabet is called Novissima Moruubales. 
 
 SCLAVONIAN. 
 
 Or ancient Russian ; taken from the Encyc. Franc, pi. X. 
 It was omitted by accident from it's proper place ia the 
 work. 
 
 REJANG 1. 
 
 Another alphabet of one of the principal internal lan- 
 guages used in the island of Sumatra. Of the two figures 
 at the end of the alphabet, the first is the mark of com- 
 mencement, and the latter of pause. 
 
 Marsden, p. 168.
 
 320 APPENDIX. 
 
 REJANG 2. 
 
 One 
 
 Do 
 
 Husband 
 
 Lackye 
 
 Two 
 
 Dooy 
 
 Wife 
 
 Soomz 
 
 Three 
 
 Tellou 
 
 Father 
 
 Bapa 
 
 Four 
 
 'Mpat 
 
 Mother 
 
 Indo 
 
 Five 
 
 Lemo 
 
 Head 
 
 Oolou 
 
 Six 
 
 Noom 
 
 Eyes 
 
 Matty 
 
 Seven 
 
 Toojooa 
 
 Nose 
 
 Eeoong 
 
 Eight 
 
 Delapoon 
 
 Hair 
 
 Boo 
 
 Nine 
 
 Sembilan 
 
 Teeth 
 
 Aypen 
 
 Ten 
 
 Depooloo 
 
 Hand 
 
 Tangoon 
 
 White 
 
 Pooteah 
 
 Black 
 
 Meloo 
 
 REJANG 2. 
 
 The above is a specimen of the Rejang language, which 
 is spoken in the island of Sumatra, and is taken from the 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Marsden, p. 168* 
 
 r
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 RWQ CD' 
 
 JAN 131969 
 
 fe/v 
 
 JUL 28 1969 
 
 Form L9-Series 444 
 
 fi. _MA: 
 
 NOVlQ 
 
 1975 
 
 FEE 2 
 
 QL 
 
 ID
 
 3 1158 00750 
 
 211 
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 AA 000032124 o 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 University of California 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from which it was borrowed. 
 
 DEC 3 12005